GaliGee

Wow, I'm news? That's so sweet. I was planning to start a COT topic, but LewaLew scooped me! :DYes, the premise of DRAWN TO DISASTER is a lot like the Makuta-GaliGee stories: dark, intimidating bad guy captures hapless blue writer and claims to fall for her. She suspects she's just a cog in his world-domination scheme, but then the plot thickens. The similarities to Bionicle are plentiful; there's even a website much like BZPower in the novel. I adapted a lot of my old jokes to my new world, too. For example, the minions of darkness are genetically engineered wolf-boys with lethal powers and the emotional maturity of kindergartners. (Sound kinda familiar?)Here's how the real world has changed. I was originally hoping to publish the traditional way, i.e., by convincing a literary agent my book would be the next big thing, and then sitting back while she swings a sweet deal with a publishing house. As one entered the Barnes & Noble, one would trip over stacks of my book. However, as I tried to convince various agents to take on my story, I started reading about authors who'd self-published. It's not like the old days, when the author had to pay a lot of money up front and then sell books out of his car trunk. Now you can set up the book for free, and make it available online through a print-on-demand service. So rather than hone my pitch and send it to yet another score of agents, I drew my own cover art, worked with an editor to revise my manuscript, and figured out the formatting. The advantage is that I had complete creative control. The disadvantage is that I'm on my own for the publicity.The paperback is now available online for $16 through my eStore. (You can also search for it on amazon.com for the same price, but I get a smaller royalty). I don't want to pressure anyone on BZPower to buy it, because I owe you guys so much already, for the years of encouragement and good times. But please DO tell your friends, like me on social media, request the book at your school library. Ask for it for Christmas. :PThis being the modern world, an author has to have a website. The first chapter is posted there, along with some art and a trivia quiz. If you have the book, you can access extra maps and stuff. I'll be babbling about all this in my COT topic, which I'm going to set up soon.So come by www.lilygee.com and take a look. Thanks for noticing, LewaLew!

Ah, so sweet to see my old friends! At long last I've posted another JITL chapter.And... *drum roll* MY BOOK IS PUBLISHED! See my sig for details. I'm going to start a COT topic on it soon.Tuan, yes, the long-awaited Makuta Island review. I'm definitely still interested, if you've already typed it up. Good times! You might want to check out my book, which has big chunks of recycled MI. It also contains bits of Road Trip with Makuta and Makuta Gets a Blast from the Past. But since the whole thing is in MY hands this time, the bad guy is capable of redemption. (Or is he?)Saya, I'm glad to see someone is reading the vintage stuff. I certainly had fun writing all that.Lielac, enjoy the new JITL. I think this entry picks up the pace a bit.Thanks for stopping by, everyone.

AZBlue & Bilbo, it's great to hear from you guys. If any of y'all are still out there, I posted a new JITL chapter today. Thrills, chills, and spills!Plus, I've published my book! Check out my signature. The paperback is available from my eStore, through Amazon.com. I plan to start a COT topic about it soon.

Summer 3 : 9Today was at turns confusing, amusing, and terrifying.Long story short, kolhii tryouts were misery. Turaga Vakama winnowed us into groups, and I was inexplicably placed with the athletes. That meant having to run faster and take harder hits, all while I struggled to pay attention to the game. After losing my mask a dozen times, I jammed a pebble between my face and the attachment rod, and that kept it from slipping.The Turaga finally pulled a chain on the parapet wall, and hot air screamed from the village whistle to announce the torment was over. I stumbled to the armory. As I removed a stack of disks from the weapons rack, my guts were churning. Nixie might tell us why we had been shooed off the telescope promontory last night, and I wasn’t sure I wanted to know. But I still couldn’t wait to see her. I reminded myself she liked the lens. And maybe even me. Kapura appeared at my elbow, and I dropped my disks. They clattered to the floor around my feet.“Hello, Chronicler,” he greeted me, bending to pick up the disks.“Thanks, but I’ve got it,” I groaned, leaning over. By the time I grasped one disk, he was handing me the rest of the stack.I looked at him in amazement. “How did—did you just—oh, never mind. Are you ready, then?”He shouldered his spear in reply, and we turned toward the doorway. Jaller was standing in it.“Hey, Jaller,” I smiled. “Thanks for deflecting that ball Hafu shot at my head. If it had connected, I’d be even goofier than usual.”“No problem, Takua,” he smiled back. “It’s my duty as Captain of the Guard to protect you. The whole island relies on your genius.” He looked us over, and it occurred to me that Kapura and I formed the flakiest possible guard unit in Ta-Koro. Fortunately, Nixie didn’t need guarding. Maybe tonight she would agree to a stroll on the beach.“Nixie doesn’t need guarding,” said Jaller. “You can take the day off.”I snapped out of my daydream. “What?”“Your guard assignment is canceled. Turaga Nokama sent word this morning. From now on, Ga-Koro will assure Nixie’s safety.”“Did—did I do something wrong?” I stuttered.“They didn’t say,” he shrugged. “It’s some female pride thing, if you ask me. You know how Maacku is.”“Yeah.” I forced a chuckle. “Always trying to beat Hewkii at arm-wrestling.” As I replaced the weapons on the rack, I felt a pang of envy. Hewkii’s girl was coarse and rowdy, but she was right for him. And I was further than ever from my perfect girl.So now I had a free evening, and except for the brief exertion of the kolhii tryouts, I was rested. I could travel and do a Toa or Turaga interview. But night would soon fall. Unfamiliar places are wonderful by day, but in the dark... The obvious solution was to go surfing. In the caverns of the volcano, the magma gives off a pleasant red glow, all the time.My friends were on guard duty at the village gate, and Kapura disliked lava. I would surf alone. I fetched my board and my crab.Riding the waves was joyous. Still, doubt gnawed at my mind about Nixie and the guard detail. And lava surfing requires full attention. After a near catastrophe with a vortex, I sprawled onto the rocky shore. I decided to go see what was happening at the telescope. I dropped off my board, told Pewku to stay in the village, and started down the trail to the north. As I ambled over the rocky terrain, I heard a loud crack. There was rumbling, followed by sharp voices. I broke into a trot. Panting, I crested a ridge with a view of the promontory.Toa Onua was holding the telescope over his head, along with a chunk of the rock it had been sitting on. Toa Gali, Toa Pohatu, and Toa Lewa were arrayed around him. A few Ga-Matoran, including Nixie, were standing on a barge tethered in the shallow water below.“Let go, Lewa,” Toa Onua insisted. “I’ve got it.”“No need, brother. I’ll make it feather-light,” said Toa Lewa, his mask glowing. Toa Onua and his burden lifted off the ground. Toa Lewa kicked him, and he floated over the edge of the cliff.“Hey!” yelled Toa Onua. He swung his burly legs as he dangled over the ocean. Back on the cliff, Toa Pohatu burst out laughing.“Stop fooling around, Lewa! It’s a delicate instrument,” the water Toa snapped. “Without Onua, it’s fairly light. I’ll just use my Matatu to get it on the barge.”“Where am I supposed to go?” asked Toa Onua, glancing at the water below. I remembered his fear of heights, and I felt a pang of sympathy.Toa Gali changed to her mask of telekinesis. “Just let go. Lewa can levitate you.”“You’re going to make a nice crater,” snorted the stone Toa.Toa Onua let go with one hand to wrench off a rock and hurl it at Toa Pohatu. The telescope wobbled. Toa Onua grabbed it again. Then it floated upward. “Lewa, I’m going to bury you!” he growled.Toa Gali flipped her axe, and a jet of water hit Toa Lewa’s mask. “Okay, okay!” he protested. The telescope dropped to the level of the cliff again.“Onua, let go,” called Toa Gali. “Please?”The earth Toa looked down and clenched his jaw. Then he released the rock. He plunged into the sea with a mighty splash. The Ga-Matoran braced themselves as his wave rocked the barge.Toa Gali’s Matatu glowed, and the telescope moved out over the craft. It descended onto the deck. Kotu and Maacku looped ropes around it. Meanwhile, Toa Onua trudged out of the surf onto the beach, dripping with water and sand. He sprinted up the cliff steps and tackled Toa Lewa. They tumbled onto the ground.Toa Pohatu doubled over with laughter. Toa Gali waved her finger at him. Then a plume of dirt exploded behind her, and she spun around. “Hey! Go clobber each other somewhere else! Grit is bad for the mechanisms.” She misted the air to make the dust settle.Toa Onua was pinning Toa Lewa to the ground. He raised his head. “Thanks, Gali,” he smiled. “You just made earth in this wasteland of a Wahi.” He scooped up a fistful and rubbed it on Toa Lewa’s mask.Toa Lewa’s Miru glowed, and the two Toa floated off the ground. The air Toa twisted sideways and landed on his feet. Then he wiped his mask and flung the mud at Toa Onua, still suspended in mid-air.“Like that’s gonna hurt me,” Toa Onua laughed. He switched to his mask of mind control.Toa Lewa started dancing. As he struggled to regain control of his limbs, the earth Toa dropped to the ground. He sprang. Toa Lewa whipped the katanas off his back. A blast of wind blew Toa Onua off the cliff. He flew straight at the barge.Toa Pohatu sprang into action. He kicked a boulder loose from the cliff, and it struck Toa Onua’s shoulder, knocking him off course. The Toa and the rock landed in the water a dozen bios from the barge.I gasped. The Ga-Matoran clutched at the telescope as the boat tilted perilously. Then the water around it was suddenly calm.Toa Gali called to her villagers. “Go ahead to Ga-Koro. I’ll meet you there.” Then she charged Toa Lewa with her axes. A blast of water sent him tumbling onto his back.Toa Pohatu activated his Kakama to whisk Toa Onua up the stairs in a green streak. When the black Toa materialized, the brown one grinned at him. “Lewa’s going down.”“You know it,” Toa Onua grinned back.The Ga-Matoran paddled frantically toward open water as a free-for-all erupted on the promontory. Water, stone, and mud flew through the air, buffeted by gale-force winds. Grunts and yells echoed off the surrounding volcanic foothills. Finally the combatants staggered apart, coughing and laughing.Toa Gali walked to the edge of the cliff and rinsed herself off. She waved at the barge, receding against the expanse of blue sea. The sailors waved back. Then she turned around. “Thanks for the help, guys,” she smiled. “Even though you were a bit ... difficult.”Toa Lewa blew the dust off himself with a katana. “Hey, a little fast-play was good. Broke up the boredom-grind.”Toa Onua rubbed his shoulder. “Anything to help with the prophecies.”“Yeah, for Onua it’s all about the prophecies,” said Toa Pohatu. “When the prophecies say ‘please,’ he’ll drop twenty bios into the sea.”Toa Onua grabbed Toa Pohatu in a headlock and rubbed the top of his mask with his fist.It was fun to watch our heroes. They need play just as much as we do, except they’re big and powerful, so it’s messier. And now I knew what was going on. They were moving the telescope to Ga-Koro, which reportedly is rebuilt with stronger docks. So it wasn’t my fault I lost my job. But I’d also lost my nights with Nixie. With a sad smile, I started back for the village.A blaze flared behind me, and I spun around. Toa Tahu was standing on a hill near the telescope promontory, his swords crossed over his head. A halo of flame radiated around him.“Tahu,” called Toa Gali.“You enter my Wahi and destroy it?” he shouted back. Wreaths of fire arced from his swords.“I’m here to claim the telescope, which belongs to my village,” Toa Gali replied evenly, hands on her hips. Her voice darkened. “I didn’t need fire.”I glanced at Toa Tahu. His mask was fierce. Then I looked back at Toa Gali and remembered watching her stand up to the Tarakava, that day in Ga-Koro.Toa Pohatu and Toa Onua exchanged worried glances. Toa Lewa levitated and deployed his katana as wings. “Hello, fire brother.” He flew toward the red Toa. “Sorry-sad for not inviting you. No hard-feels?”Toa Tahu blasted him backwards with twin jets of flame.The air Toa tumbled into a ravine. He got to his feet. “Seek-find me when you’ve cooled off,” he said with a wary smile. He sailed into the sky.“We’ll be on our way, then,” said Toa Pohatu, patting Toa Onua’s shoulder. His mask blurred, and they were gone.Toa Gali hadn’t moved. The lines of her Kaukau Nuva were stern. “Cut it out, Tahu. You don’t scare me.”Toa Tahu sprang. As he sailed across the gap toward the promontory, Toa Gali cart-wheeled off the cliff into the sea.She surfaced. The red Toa loomed above her on the bluff, flames forming a cape around his shoulders. She gave him a defiant laugh. “Go ahead. Burn up the ocean.”She dove as he aimed his swords. Fire rolled down the cliff and raged across the beach. When it hit the water, it became a scalding cloud of steam. The water retreated, hissing, from the sand. Fifty bios from shore, the heat wave finally succumbed to the cold mass of the sea, and waves crashed back towards the shore.I sighed. It was a good thing I’d been the only witness. I think the Turaga would have been horrified, and the Matoran completely demoralized.A glint of sun caught my eye, further up in the hills. A lone, pale figure stood amidst the basalt crags. I perceived the outlines of an Akaku Nuva before it changed to a Huna and vanished.I trudged home, gave Pewku her dinner, and wrote this entry. I don’t care what time it is, or when I wake up. I’m going to bed. :kaukaunu:Reply topic here.

Hey, y'all.Wraith, thanks for the encouragement! If money is an issue, get someone else to buy my book for you. Problem solved. :biggrin:I just posted a new chapter of JITL, if anyone is still out there. :lookaround:And thanks to Miraka for sending me links to my Makuta and GaliGee MOCs, which I had completely forgotten. Links are in the first post now.

Summer 3 : 8I woke about noon, and after a quick snack with Pewku, I explored the village for a suitable place to work on my lens. Since everyone is used to me wandering around looking clueless, I got a few warm greetings but no questions. I found a secluded parapet with a shaft of sunshine where I could file in peace, testing my work from time to time against the light.After some time, the shape of the lens seemed right. I gave it a finishing polish with an emery stone to make it shiny. I admired the way it bent the light, imagining Nixie’s thrilled reaction. Then I noticed a low din in the corridors below me. Kolhii tryouts.I carefully wrapped the glass object in a cloth, slipped it in my pack, and joined the pilgrimage to the stadium. It was all I could do to keep my head in the game. After the third time the ball knocked off my mask, Jaller took me aside. “Takua, are you all right?”I shoved my mask back on my face and smiled. “Yeah. I’m just... well, thinking about work for a change.”He laughed and tossed me the ball. This time I caught it in my stick.Raku and Lito are trying hard to make the team. It’s funny to watch them get serious about something. I think they might actually have a chance, because they’re really agile from surfing. In a group passing drill I tossed them setup shots, and they made acrobatic jumps to trap the ball and fire it at the goal. Kind of like the move I made at the party, except deliberate and graceful.Turaga Vakama paced in the sky box, barking at Kapura, who scribbled down his remarks. Kapura won’t be on the team, since his translation skills would throw the game into chaos, and without translating he’s incredibly slow. Toa Tahu watched, arms crossed, and offered occasional advice. He’s never played kolhii, or even the old koli, but he instinctively understands physics. Turaga Vakama won’t say if he’s ever played.Finally practice was over, and Kapura met me at the armory. Being the Turaga’s scribe, he might have an idea when the tryouts would be over. As I picked up a spear, I asked, “So, has Turaga Vakama selected our two best athletes yet?”Kapura took a stack of disks. “The Turaga is not looking for the best athletes. He’s looking for the players with the most heart.”A Turaga’s words, conveyed by Kapura. What could be more enigmatic? “I thought he wanted us to win,” I muttered. He didn't answer.We set off for the telescope promontory. I marched briskly, instead of ambling or running for my life (my usual modes of locomotion). Kapura slouched along. Whenever he started to lag behind, he would pop up in front of me. We arrived at the base of the rock, and I called out to Nixie.The heavenly astrologer waved from the doorway. Then we took our posts, me on a rock outcrop near the pedestal and Kapura pacing the beach. I fidgeted as if my armor were being needled by Kofo-Jaga. When enough time had passed that I didn’t feel I was being pushy, I poked my head inside the door. “Nixie?”Nixie gave me her radiant smile. “Come in, Takua.”“I made a thing, uh, something for you,” I stammered, stepping inside. “I don’t know if it’ll actually be useful, but, um, I was thinking, maybe it would... well, here it is, anyway.” I unwrapped the glass object I had been honing for days and all but dropped it on the floor.She lifted it from my shaking hand. “Thank you, Takua. It’s lovely. Oh, it magnifies things!” She held it over her fingers.“Yes, I thought you might use it to...” My hand was tingling where she had touched it, and I forgot what I was saying.Nixie positioned the lens over the telescope crystal. “This is wonderful!” she exclaimed. “Thank you so much! How did you make it?”“I melted some sand, poured it into a mold, and polished it. Nothing too complicated, really.”“Ingenious nonetheless.” She held up the lens. “Look at the rainbows around the edge. It's splitting the light into colors.”“Is that a problem?” I asked.“Not at all. I think it's pretty. You know, with red and yellow and blue, it’s possible to mix any color.”She liked my weird coloring! I watched her put the lens over the crystal again and lean her mask against it. “I can see so much more now,” she marveled.After a few minutes I began to feel eclipsed by my own gift. “So, what are you seeing so much more of?”She straightened up and looked at me. “Your star, Takua,” she said softly.“Oh,” I smiled. “How’s it doing?”“It’s more luminous than ever,” she smiled back.If only my prospects of winning Nixie were as bright! The way things were going, just maybe... I’d better not get distracted. “Aren't all the stars more luminous now?”She pivoted the gimbals and admired some other astral object. “Yes, I can see all of them more clearly. But yours is...” The scope swiveled back to my star. “Yours has an aura. And it’s sending out flares. Look.” She stepped back.I leaned over and saw the yellow star. Streaks of gold fire shot out from a blazing halo. I gave her a puzzled look. “What does it mean?”“You got me,” she shrugged.For once I said something in her presence that was almost clever. “I’ve been hoping eventually I would.”Nixie blushed.I blinked. She saw truth in my word play!I swallowed. Then I took a tiny step toward her. She didn’t move. I opened my mouth, hoping my brain wouldn’t turn to mush before words came out. “Nixie, I... I’d like...”Then Kapura materialized in the middle of the room. I jumped back. My foot caught on a stone tablet, and I fell backwards onto my rear.Nixie put her hands on her Pakari. “Oh, Takua, I’m sorry! I’ve let it get so messy up here.”“It’s not your fault. I’m just clumsy.” I straightened my own mask. Kapura was extending his spear handle, and I grabbed it. He pulled me to my feet. “Turaga Nokama is arriving by boat,” he announced. Then he vanished again.“I should get back to my post,” I said.Nixie winced. “It would be best.” She picked up her pen and leaned over the telescope with its new lens.I paused at the doorway and glanced back at her. I had to know whether she was displeased with me. “So... does Kapura have a star?”She looked up and grinned. “Oh, yes. It keeps me on my toes. Just when I have it located and mapped, it disappears and reappears somewhere else.”With a relieved smile, I stepped outside. Then, my mask sober again, I picked up my scattered weapons and resumed my position on the outcrop.Kapura saluted me from the beach and pointed at an approaching canoe. Soon I could discern the water Turaga in the bow. Maacku and Kotu were rowing.We walked up as the Ga-Matoran grounded the boat on the sand and jumped out. “Ho, Chronicler and Kapura!” shouted Maacku.“Hello, Turaga Nokama, Maacku, Kotu,” I said. Kapura nodded.“Greetings,” said the village leader, stepping from the canoe. “I trust all is well?”I cleared my throat. She had probably seen me racing out of the pedestal. “Yes, Turaga.”Maacku and Kotu had unloaded some rolled maps and were heading for the staircase. As they passed, Maacku whispered, “You just got fired, Takua.”“What?” I muttered. She was already climbing the steps. I glanced at Kapura, but his mask was blank.My heart raced. I had certainly been getting to work on time. Had she heard I was inappropriate with Nixie? I thought back on the previous day’s detail. I’d talked with the divine astrologer for a little while, but I hadn’t done anything wrong. I hoped the Turaga wouldn’t punish her.“Excuse me, Takua.” said Turaga Nokama. I was standing between her and the stairs.“I’m sorry.” I retreated out of her way. “Uh, Turaga Nokama, I know I’ve been distracting Nixie, but I can explain. I made something for her telescope.”“Really?” she asked, tilting her head.Nixie had come out. “Oh, Turaga Nokama, you should see this!” she exclaimed. “Takua’s lens makes everything so much clearer.”Turaga Nokama followed her into the pedestal. Maacku and Kotu were measuring its base and making notes on a map.Kapura had resumed his slow march along the beach. I clenched my jaw and took the position on the outcrop. Was the Turaga indeed here to chastise me? Would the lens change her mind?Soon her tiny, hunched form came out of the doorway and walked toward me. To my surprise, she laid a blue hand on my arm. “Takua, your lens is brilliant. Thank you for blessing Mata Nui with a tool to see the ancient prophecies more clearly.”“You’re welcome,” I said, remembering to breathe again.“And thank you for your service guarding Nixie. You may return to your village now. We’ll take responsibility for her safety for the rest of the night.”“I understand,” I nodded, even though I didn’t.It was almost dawn anyway. On the way back to Ta-Koro, Kapura did his fall-behind, appear-ahead thing. My feet kept a steady pace, but my mind was racing. The Turaga hadn’t fired me, she had given me a little time off. But if my misbehavior hadn’t moved her to sail before sunup, what had? Some astrological emergency? Did it have to do with my freakish star? And why were the Matoran measuring the pedestal?And more importantly, did I dream it, or does Nixie like me, too?I shuffled to my room and flopped onto the bed with a sigh. At least one thing went well today. My lens works, and Nixie was pleased. :kaukaunu:Reply topic here.

Journey into the Light (Part I: The Bohrok-Kal and Part II: Peacetime) is Takua's journal as he chronicles the Toa's confrontation with the Bohrok-Kal and the following time of peace, up to the day he stumbles onto the golden mask that changes his life forever.Tell me what you think!

GregF has been an incredible blessing to BZPower, not only for his imaginative and inspiring stories, but also for his exceptional friendliness and accessibility to us fans. I applaud his decision to spend some time with his new little angel (I've been there -- nothing matters more! ). Eventually she'll be more self-sufficient, and his life will become semi-normal again. Hopefully that will include penning a tidbit of Bionicle lore from time to time. Thanks in advance, LEGO, for sharing Greg's talents with us.

Imold, thanks for the encouragement and offer of help! ^_^I'm happy to announce that all the old stories are up now (damaged ones are re-posted in the new forum), and the links are all operational (please let me know if you find a broken one). Journey into the Light: Part I, The Bohrok-Kal is completely re-posted, and Part II, Peacetime is re-posted up to the point I had left off. I'm currently about halfway done writing the next chapter. I forgot how fun it is to write as Takua, the little multicolored scamp! When I get it online, I'll start a review topic.Meanwhile, my editor says she's mid-way through my Drawn to Disaster manuscript. I'm planning to start a topic in COT soon. Y'all check out my site (see sig), and sign up for my e-mail list! It has the outlandish adventure and ironic romance of the evil-mastermind-courts-skeptical-writer premise, as you've come to know from the Makuta-GaliGee stories, but this time I control the entire storyline. It's basically an unholy fusion of Road Trip with Makuta, Makuta Island, Blast from the Past, Road Trip with Krahka, and Tangled Web.Thanks for popping in!

Summer 3 : 6Today at breakfast Jaller came through for me yet again. As I was shuffling reluctantly out of the dining hall, dreading another day of my nitpicking, grumbling boss, the Captain pulled me aside. “Takua, I have a new assignment for you. After all, technically you’re still a member of the Guard.”I smiled, wondering how he had talked Turaga Vakama out of his Takua-still-needs-to-learn-from-Tupako idea. “What is it? It can’t be any worse than what I’m doing now.”“You’ll like it, I think. Except that you’ll have to work at night.”I immediately stiffened because I don’t like the dark, but then I noticed a twinkle in Jaller’s eye. “Yeah, so?” I replied offhandedly.“You’re going to be stationed on guard duty at the telescope,” he grinned.My mouth dropped open. I imagined myself sitting on the rock outcrop scanning the horizon for non-existent threats while Nixie trained the precision instrument on the stars. We would take a dinner break together, and I would stare into her beautiful eyes while she talked to me about her observations.“With Kapura,” Jaller added.That brought me back to reality. Of course guards are always stationed in teams of two. Well, at least Kapura is a decent fellow. “Thanks, Jaller. That’s great! When do I start?”“Tonight. If you want, you can go back to your room and take a nap. But be sure to wake up in time for the kolhii tryouts this afternoon.”I groaned at this prospect. I like to play kolhii, but it’s obvious I’m not going to make the team, because there are at least a hundred Ta-Koronans who are better than I am. And I knew everyone would be showing off and trying to make the others look bad. “Okay. I think I could use some more sleep. I’ll see you this afternoon.”I took a good, long nap, and then I went to kolhii tryouts. It was almost as bad as I had expected. But I tried to ignore all the posturing, and I managed to have a pretty good time, anyway. Then, after supper, Kapura and I picked up a couple of spears and a stack of disks from the armory, and we set out for the telescope rock.Nixie was all smiles when we showed up. “I don’t know why the Turaga are so worried about me, but I certainly appreciate the company,” she beamed. We took our places at the base of the telescope while she did her work. I had never realized how hard she had to concentrate to do her observations. But after she took a break to explain to me exactly what she does, it makes sense. She doesn’t just admire the pretty stars and call it a night. She makes meticulous measurements and takes copious notes on where they are and how brightly they are shining, and then she uses all kinds of complicated mathematical formulas to predict where they’re going, check whether they are following previous predictions, and adjust the parameters if not. Doing that much math would give me a headache in no time, but Nixie seems to thrive on it. My favorite girl has some serious smarts.Anyway, it wasn’t exactly the romantic evening I had first pictured, but Kapura and I had some nice (if sometimes cryptic) conversations, and I did get to look at Nixie while she studied the stars. That alone was worth spending the night sitting outside in the dark. And, oh, yes, I didn’t have to listen to Tupako taunt me about my same old name! Have I mentioned that Jaller is the best friend ever?Summer 3 : 7(I guess technically it’s the eighth because it’s morning already, but just to keep from confusing myself, I’m going to call it the seventh, because that’s when most of this stuff happened.)Today I proudly used my official excuse to sleep past noon. Still, I got up a couple hours before the kolhii tryouts, because I have a new mission: to make Nixie a gift. The idea has been simmering in my head ever since Raku and Lito came by the Wall of History with those little bits of glass from the Kohrak incident. I didn’t get it finished today, but it looks like it might actually work.I walked down to the beach and scooped some sand into a bowl, selected a nice medium-sized piece of fine-grained basalt, and took them down to the foundry. Everyone had already left for the day except the night crew, who just hang around and keep an eye on things in case there’s a problem. So I pretty much had the place to myself. I know my way around, of course, because of the miserable job I used to have until Jaller rescued me.I found a crucible and poured some sand into it, and then I slid it into one of the protodermis furnaces. Even though it had cooled off some since the end of the work shift, it was still plenty hot to melt sand. While the sand was turning to liquid, I carved a shallow indentation into the basalt and finished it as smoothly as I could with my Chronicler’s staff. I poured in the melted sand. Then I picked the whole thing up using a pair of tongs and carried it to the cooling tank. I dropped it in, and a huge cloud of steam boiled up onto my mask.A few minutes later, I took the tongs and fished my creation out of the water. I held it up to the lightstone in the center of the room, and to my delight, it sort of worked! The image through the lens was about twice the size of the real object. Unfortunately, it was also very distorted. After staring at it and turning it different ways, I figured it must be because the lens was lopsided.I tried it again, carefully lowering the mold into the tank. The second lens came out a lot less warped. It was kind of opaque, but I think that’s just the rough outside surface. I’m pretty sure I can polish the glass and make it clear. I admired it for a few minutes, but then I had to get over to the stadium, so I put away all the equipment and slipped the lens into my backpack. I’ll have to polish it later. I borrowed a file from the tool room, too. Hopefully no one will miss it.Kolhii tryouts were unpleasantly tense. Turaga Vakama is incredibly obsessed with this tournament, and he’s making us do one drill after another, carefully analyzing everyone’s skill and temperament so he can pick the best team. The usual friendly rivalry with Po-Koro has been heightened by the fact that the championship match is scheduled for our new stadium instead of theirs. Evidently Turaga Onewa has vowed to hand us an ignoble defeat on our home field, and Turaga Vakama is determined to prevent it. I just hope he’ll hurry up and announce the team, so playing kolhii can be fun and relaxing again for the rest of us.Then it was back to the telescope rock. Even though I was anxious to work on my lens, I didn’t want Nixie to see it yet. So I left it in my pack and just reveled in her presence instead. Except that Kapura kept interrupting my daydreams. He would teleport himself behind a boulder or a bush and make a weird snarling or scraping or rustling noise. I would grab my disk, heartlight pounding, and creep around to see what sort of slavering carnivorous Rahi was stalking us, only to find him there, laughing. Finally I asked him to stop. Then he translated himself back to the village and returned with a Juma-Juvo board. This passed the time quite pleasantly for a while, although of course he beat me every time. He’s not as ruthless an opponent as Jaller, but just when you start dismissing his moves as totally random, you realize he’s cornered you.Nixie was really focused on her work, but eventually she took a break and enjoyed some of the roasted nuts I brought for her. Kapura suddenly decided he wanted to take a stroll on the beach, Mata Nui bless him. I guess he got a clue, after all. Nixie said Turaga Nokama was really preoccupied with the kolhii tournament, too. It’s been many years since the Ga-Koronans have won one, and no one is giving them good odds for even getting into the final match. But after listening to so much blustery talk by the stone and fire villagers, the water Turaga thinks it would be really hilarious to rout them both.As dawn approached and the glow of the sun rendered the stars more difficult to see, my beloved packed up her papers and got back in her little boat. I wanted to row it home for her, but she pointed out that it was only a short distance across the bay, whereas it was quite a long walk back to Ta-Koro. She assured me that Turaga Nokama would be awake by now, awaiting her arrival. So I stood on the beach and watched her little craft disappear on the glittering waves. Kapura waited for me, and then we walked back to the village together.I stayed up for a couple more hours in my room, polishing the lens. With the roughest bumps gone, the image is a lot easier to see. I’ve got maybe another two hours to go on it. Now that I’m caught up on my journal, I’m going to let my hands rest. That's everything I posted in the old forum. From here on, it will be new chapters!If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Summer 2 : 2Sure enough, I dreamt of darkness last night. Darkness closing in, suffocating me, and drawing me away into nothingness. Nixie was standing there watching me with a strange look on her face, as if she couldn’t see the darkness, but she knew I was in trouble somehow. She reached out her hand, and I grabbed for it. I felt the cool touch of her fingers as they slipped between mine, and then she was gone.I sat up with a start, my heart pounding. The sun had just come up and filled the sky with beautiful peach and purple tones. I sighed and looked at my hand, wondering what Nixie’s fingers really felt like.This morning the Toa were just as moody as the night before. After a quick bite of breakfast, Toa Tahu led everyone wordlessly onward into the shadowy mountains. Although the sun was shining and the sky was radiant overhead, down in the canyon where we walked the light had a pale, bluish cast.After a short distance, Toa Gali stopped us in front of a carving. I marveled that anyone would spend enough time in this creepy place to complete such a work. There was a group of six large figures, apparently Toa, but they didn’t look like our Toa. Their masks were different, and their bodies, although proportioned the same, had different armor. This puzzled me, because I thought there had only been six Toa throughout all of history. The Toa (the real ones) were discussing how the Turaga might know something about this that we didn’t—for example, the identity of the monster the carved Toa were fighting.I leaned closer and studied the image of the creature. It was obviously huge and dangerous, a bizarre conglomeration of all the scary things you could think of. I stepped back, glad those Toa of old had been the ones to confront it, and not us.We resumed the trail as the sun finally drove off the morning chill. Toa Tahu shouted up ahead. As we came around a bend in the path, we saw the Toa standing in front of three Great Masks, set on stakes in the ground.“This has got to be the easiest Kanohi quest ever,” laughed Jala. “It’s about time our Toa finally got a lucky break.”But he spoke too soon. As the Toa reached out to grab the masks, the ground fell away beneath them, and they disappeared into a yawning abyss with a great rumble and cloud of dust.Jala, Puku, and I cautiously approached the edge of the crater and peered through the opaque air. The crevasse went so deep into the earth that we couldn’t see the bottom of it. Jala gave me a worried look. “Well, at least one of those masks was a Miru,” I said, trying to reassure him as well as myself.Jala looked at the steep sides of the opening and sighed. “I suppose all we can do now is wait until they find their way back here.”We sat down on a rock, alert to any sounds that might indicate their return. After a while, we heard the sound of footsteps, but it was coming up the mountain from below. We scrambled behind the rock, Puku crouching low with her legs gathered under her shell.“Ho, little fire-spitters!” called a familiar voice. We raised our heads above the rock to see Toa Lewa approaching in his green Akaku. He changed back to his mask of levitation. “This crazy thing makes me double-see if I use it too long.”“Hello, Toa Lewa,” greeted Jala.“What are you sight-seeing up here for?” asked the Toa of Air, sitting down on the rock next to us. “There are much more pretty-bright places to travel on Mata Nui.”We explained what had happened. Toa Lewa changed back to his Akaku and studied the hole in the ground, evidently finding nothing of interest. “Odd-strange,” he remarked. “I came here to find my last power-mask, too. Turaga Matau warned me this place was full of dark-fear surprises. I think I’ll take a different way-path. Care to come along?”“We should probably stay here,” suggested Jala. “The others will look for us here.” The green Toa cheerfully took his leave, passing around the hole and continuing up the mountain.A few minutes later we heard another rumbling sound. “Oh, no!” cried Jala. “What if Toa Lewa has fallen, too?”“Well, we know HE has a Miru,” I sighed.“Let’s go see if he’s all right,” urged Jala. We followed the trail a little further up into the hills, and sure enough, we found another giant hole in the ground. “Toa Lewa?” called Jala frantically, but there was no response.“Such interest in the earth,” mused a low voice behind us. We spun to see Toa Onua standing there. Toa Pohatu walked past us over to the hole and looked down.Jala recounted what had just happened. “Watch your step,” he cautioned.“We will,” promised Toa Onua, joining his brown brother at the edge of the abyss. “Especially Pohatu, with those big feet.”Toa Pohatu punched his arm. “You’re such a featherweight that you won’t have any trouble,” he grinned. “But seriously, we’ll be careful. Turaga Onewa told me this was treacherous ground. As soon as we find our masks, we’ll be—”“There.” The Toa of Earth pointed ahead to two Kanohi, on stakes as the others had been.“Will you look at that!” Toa Pohatu exclaimed, striding over to the masks. “Wait!” shouted Toa Onua. “Let’s not fall for the same trick.” He changed to his Matatu, and the masks drifted off the stakes toward him and Toa Pohatu. As their fingers touched the Kanohi, the ground shook and fell away from under them with a deafening roar. Jala and I jumped back against the rocky cliffs, panting in panic. The stakes remained, untouched, where they had been.“Well, whoever it is must just want the Toa,” I breathed.Jala nodded. “Do you suppose we could somehow...”I leaned over the edge, then backed away. “No way,” I said. “It’s too steep. But they’ll think of something,” I said anxiously. “The Toa are very resourceful.”“Indeed they are,” said a calm voice. Turaga Vakama was making his way up the mountain toward us. “We shall now see just how resourceful, I believe.”“Turaga Vakama!” said Jala with surprise. “What are you doing here?”“Well,” said the elder, leaning on his firestaff, “I heard from your scouts that Gali had called Tahu to this place, and I was anxious to see the outcome.”If Turaga Vakama was anxious, it was surely a bad sign. “Do you know what’s down there?” I asked.“I’m afraid I do. And I’ve got to get down there and find them before it does.” He stood up straight again and began to hike rapidly up the mountain.“But they’re—” Jala began.“Sometimes you must go up to go down,” quipped the Turaga enigmatically. “Just as sometimes you must fall before you fly.”We sat quietly for a little while. “Wisdom baffles me,” I finally said after Turaga Vakama had disappeared from sight.“Do you think that thing on the carving—” But Jala’s words faded from my consciousness as a vision from Toa Gali unfolded in my mind. And there, in front of her, was the thing on the carving.Words just can’t describe how horrible that thing was. It looked like the worst bit of every Rahi, combined into one immense, snarling nightmare. With Muaka claws, a Kane-Ra head, Rama wings, Tarakava fists, and a Jaga stinger, it looked like it could kill you in several different ways without much effort.And then we heard its roar. I heard it in the vision, but later Jala told me he heard it coming up through the ground as well. It was a scream of untamed rage, ringing through the caverns that contained it. And through Toa Gali’s eyes, I saw that the Toa were trapped in the chamber with it. In the gloom, I saw a dim red glow—Turaga Vakama’s firestaff.The Turaga was apparently the focus of the beast’s attention. It stared at him until Toa Tahu stepped in front of him and shouted a challenge. The animal charged, its head lowered, and slammed against his protective shield. The Toa of Fire flew backwards, and Toa Onua cushioned his impact by putting himself between his red brother and the wall. They both tumbled to the ground.Toa Lewa attempted to create a vacuum around the creature with his Kakama, but it tripped him and sent him sprawling. I gasped as Toa Gali narrowly avoided the vicious stinger with a back flip. But this apparently all this gave Toa Kopaka an idea, and the Toa soon began to follow his plan of distraction and movement. The enraged creature bellowed again as Toa Pohatu’s climbing claws brought stalactites down on its head.Jala says that the earth was shaking during this whole fight. The Toa used their Pakari to send shock waves through the stone floor of the chamber, and the beast was getting more and more angry. But the Toa were getting tired, and no end was in sight. Then Turaga Vakama began to bait the Rahi with words. He reminded it of the last time they had fought, calling it slow-witted.Last time they had fought? I had barely begun to consider the implications of these words from our frail old Turaga when he added, “Did your master abandon you... or is he the reason you are here?”Well, at this point something happened that is going to give me nightmares, for sure. A big pair of glowing red eyes appeared on the wall. And a voice that chilled me to the core said, “It has not been abandoned, Vakama. It has been waiting for your return.”I recognized that voice. I’ve only heard it once, when the Toa defeated Makuta and Toa Gali’s visions from Mangaia stopped, and I went down there to watch the fight. And I’ll never forget it. It’s the sound of grinding stone and cold despair, all rolled into one voice. Slow, deliberate, icy words, chosen to take the heart of anyone foolish enough to consider himself brave.The voice promised, “You cannot stop the darkness from falling, Vakama. No one can.”“We can, and we shall!” argued Toa Tahu.Makuta made him a deal. “Defeat my Rahi, and you may leave this chamber. Fail, and Mata Nui is mine!” And then the eyes vanished.Turaga Vakama told the Toa to run while he distracted it. They reluctantly agreed, Toa Tahu and Toa Gali staying in the mouth of the tunnel to wait for him. Turaga Vakama taunted the creature some more until it rushed toward him in a blind rage. Using his Huna, he vanished at the last moment. The beast slammed into the wall so hard its horns became embedded deep in the stone. Thrashing and clamoring, it struggled to pull itself free. Turaga Vakama joined the Toa and led them toward the surface, and the vision was over.Jala was leaning over me. “What happened, Takua?” he asked nervously.“The Toa won,” I panted. “Well, actually, Turaga Vakama did. He defeated that creature on the carving.”Jala’s eyes were wide as throwing disks. “You’re kidding me!”“No, I’m not.” I recounted the whole story to him.Soon the Toa and Turaga Vakama came walking around a bend up ahead. They greeted us solemnly. “Come along, little ones,” invited Toa Tahu, leading us down the mountain.A few minutes later, we heard a muffled roar. It was the beast, which Turaga Vakama called the Rahi Nui, still hollering in frustration. “It will free itself from the wall eventually,” he remarked, “but it still won’t be able to get out of that chamber.”The campfire conversation tonight was quite lively. We descended to a flat area below the place of shadow and built a roaring fire. Turaga Vakama went on to Ko-Koro to meet with Turaga Nuju, but the Toa stayed to confer on plans to confront the Kal. All of them had opinions about the strange events they had just witnessed.“The Turaga are definitely holding back,” muttered Toa Tahu angrily. “They owe it to us to explain what’s going on. How can we fight the perils that menace the Matoran if we don’t know what has gone before?”Toa Onua was more philosophical. “I share your frustration, Tahu. But we have to trust the Turaga. They have always revealed critical information before we’ve needed it.”“For once I agree with you, Tahu. But let’s not worry about that now,” suggested Toa Kopaka. “What we really need to be discussing is how to defeat the Kal and get our powers back.”Toa Pohatu asked, “We all have our masks, right?” Everyone nodded.“Who has seen the Kal lately?” asked Toa Gali.Toa Lewa groaned. “Last time I saw one of those power-bugs, it was that Tahnok. Zapped me good, too. I was jiggle-buzzing for about half an hour.” I glanced at Jala, who winced at the memory.The Toa drew a map in the dirt and plotted the locations where the Kal had last been seen. “Direct attacks are obviously futile. Our best attempts have used the element of surprise on one or two of them,” Toa Kopaka pointed out. “We should split up and search for them.”“I think we should stay together,” said Toa Gali firmly. “The six of us might be able to waylay a small group of them and take a couple of symbols back.”“True,” replied Toa Lewa. “But the other three or four could be wake-rousing the Bahrag while we do that. We have to keep an eye-watch on them all.”“Let’s at least figure out where they all are first. And while we’re at it, maybe we can keep them from finding all their krana-kal,” added Toa Onua. “They seem to be as intent on doing that as they are on finding the Bahrag.”The Toa decided to split up and track down all the Bohrok-Kal. If they saw any of the enemy heading for the Bahrag lair, the Toa agreed to use their Kakama to warn the others. Then they would converge on the lair and do whatever they could to stop the creatures from waking the Bahrag.“How?” asked Toa Gali, skeptical.“We’ll figure that out when we get there,” shrugged Toa Tahu. “We’ll find a way.”Everyone went to sleep encouraged by Turaga Vakama’s victory, and by the plan. As nebulous as it was, at least it gave us some hope for the future.I volunteered for guard duty, so here I sit writing. The last thing I want is more nightmares about the evil one. Since I’m at the end of the day’s events, I’m going to take a quick walk around the campsite to keep myself awake.Summer 2 : 4The Toa have defeated the Kal! And they have their powers back! Matoran, rejoice! Let’s hope our newfound peace lasts a bit longer than last time.Heh… that’s not much of a journal entry, is it?All right, I’ll add some more detail. After all, I like being long-winded. That is the way of the Chronicler.Last night Toa Tahu brought us home with his Kakama. Toa Tahu, Jala, and I told Turaga Vakama and the Ta-Koronans how the Toa won as we sat around the fire last night. Afterwards I was so tired that for the first time since I’ve owned this journal, I went right to sleep without writing anything. But today when I woke up, the sun was already halfway across the sky. It felt great to sleep in! I had nothing pressing to do other than poke Jala until he woke up, get something to eat, and write in my book. Jala went back to bed after lunch.The whole village is preparing for a big victory party tonight. Since Jala and I have been all over the island and are completely exhausted, no one is expecting us to do anything. At some point I need to carve all this into the wall of history. I’ll start tomorrow. Or maybe the next day.But before I forget, here’s what happened yesterday.In the morning, right after breakfast, the Toa split up to find the Bohrok-Kal again. The plan was for each to head toward his own Wahi. Jala, Puku, and I were to stay at the Kini-Nui, where the Toa could easily find us, and relay reports of the whereabouts of the Toa and the Kal.Toa Tahu walked up a high hill and scanned the horizon with his Akaku. When he had confirmed there were no Kal in sight, he changed to his Kakama, and we raced to the great temple. I set my pack on the steps and sat down. Jala climbed up the platform to take a lookout post.Toa Tahu smiled at us and turned to go, but then we heard a noise in the bushes. I was really glad he hadn’t left yet, because out of the undergrowth emerged the sinister figure of the Lehvak-Kal.Toa Tahu changed to his Hau and gripped his swords. “Well, you can tell the others where the Lehvak-Kal is,” he said grimly. “Minus one krana-kal, if I have anything to do with it.” He charged his foe.“You won’t,” scoffed the Kal. It raised its hand shields. Suddenly the air started to whistle past us, drawing us toward the creature. Jala, Puku, and I tumbled down the steps of the temple. Toa Tahu changed to his Pakari and jabbed his swords into the ground, but they were pulled back up like two tent stakes in a tornado.Just as the Toa of Fire was about to slam into the Kal, it reversed the flow, dashing us all against the base of the temple. The Bohrok-Kal rummaged in the bushes for a moment, then placed a new krana under its head plate. It turned and trotted away.Jala and I groaned and sat up slowly, but Toa Tahu jumped to his feet. He changed to his Kakama and raced into the woods. After a few minutes we heard the whoosh of a strong wind, and some crashing sounds. There was silence for a while, then more noises further away.As I gathered the food which had spilled out of my pack, I said, “How long is he going to harass that thing? He’s just getting beat up, and it’s not doing any good.”Jala shook his head. “Maybe not, but he’s determined to keep trying. Perhaps he’ll get lucky and the Kal will make a stupid mistake. If he doesn’t try, he has no chance whatsoever of succeeding.”“Good point. I guess that’s why he’s the protector of our village.”“Yep,” Jala agreed. “Being big and strong isn’t what makes Toa Tahu a hero. It’s his character. A hero never gives up.”We played a game of Juma-Juvo to pass the time. After Jala had trounced me, he started asking me about my journal. “What do you write in that thing, anyway?”“Oh, all kinds of stuff. Things to put on the Wall of History. And random thoughts and observations.”“Read me some of it,” he suggested.I flipped open my journal and read him an entry. It was the one where he taught the Toa some hand-to-hand combat techniques. He smiled at me. “Is that going to go onto the Wall?”“Sure,” I replied. “The Toa aren’t the only heroes on Mata Nui.”Jala laughed. “Just doing my job.” But I could tell he was really proud.Around mid-morning Toa Gali appeared, her gray mask grim with fatigue and worry. “I’m following the Kohrok-Kal,” she informed us. “I found it over by the Hura-Mafa River delta. And my head still feels like it’ll explode from the sound.” She touched the side of her head gingerly with her hand. “Now it’s moving toward Le-Wahi.”“Toa Tahu was fighting the Lehvak-Kal,” Jala told her. “They were headed the same way.” Toa Gali nodded. “At least they’re moving away from the Bahrag lair. I’m going to warn Lewa that it’s coming.” She vanished in a blue blur.Soon Toa Onua showed up to report that he had found the Tahnok-Kal in the jungle on the way to his Wahi. Before he left again, Toa Pohatu appeared. He told us he hadn’t found any Kal in his region yet. Then he offered to help Toa Onua with the Tahnok. “I have a great idea,” he said, his eyes twinkling. “Come on, I’ll explain as we go.” The two dark Toa left again.Toa Lewa swung out of the trees and landed in the clearing with a thud. “I track-found the Gahlok-Kal,” he announced to us. “It stuck-fixed my katanas to a rock and got ahead-past me while I was hard-pulling them off, so I’m not sure where it is now—somewhere in my Wahi. Gotta go!” He jumped up, grabbed a vine, and was on his way.Then Toa Tahu appeared again. “I just saw Lewa and told him where the Lehvak-Kal is. I’m going back to Ta-Wahi to make sure there aren’t any more Kal there.” He headed for the region of fire.About noon, Toa Kopaka passed by the temple. He was pursuing the Pahrak-Kal, which was leading him toward Ta-Wahi. We told him what the others were doing. He scratched his head thoughtfully, and then his eyes lit up. “Gali and Lewa are in Le-Wahi? I think I’ll leave the Pahrak-Kal for Tahu.” He streaked away into the jungle. It’s always hard to tell what Toa Kopaka is thinking, but Jala and I guessed that he had just come up with a really good idea. Later on we found out what it was. Toa Tahu returned from Ta-Wahi, blackened with burn marks. “After the Pahrak-Kal blasted me, it stopped what it was doing very suddenly and started walking this way again. I think it might have gotten a signal from another Kal.” He sat wearily on the bottom step of the temple. “What are the others doing?”Jala explained that three Toa were in Le-Wahi with three of the Kal, and two were in the jungle in the direction of Onu-Wahi with one Kal. The fifth Kal was the one Toa Tahu had just seen.“So no one has located the Nuhvok-Kal,” sighed Toa Tahu. “Maybe it’s the one that signaled the Pahrak. It could be digging its way down to the Bahrag right now! Could it be time...” His voice trailed off and his eyes grew distant.“Time for what?” I asked.Toa Tahu sighed enigmatically. Later on, of course, we found out what he was talking about, too. “I’ve got to get everyone together. I’m going to Le-Wahi to look for the Toa there. When Onua and Pohatu show up, please send them after me.”As soon as he left, my eyesight went black, and I started getting a vision from Toa Gali. I saw her standing with Toa Lewa and Toa Kopaka in the jungle in front of the Lehvak-Kal. Then something amazing happened. The Toa began to pull themselves apart, first with their hands and then using their Matatu. The pieces levitated into place and began to assemble themselves into a giant being. As soon as he had hands, Wairuha snapped the last parts into place and put on his Miru Nuva. He looked very different from the Wairuha I had seen fighting Makuta’s Manas. With no elemental powers, he was not at full strength, but since the Toa’s bodies got stronger when they became Nuva, he was still an impressive sight to me. The Toa Nuva Kaita of Wisdom flexed his mighty arms and faced his foe.Apparently he didn’t impress the Bohrok-Kal much, though. The Lehvak whistled, and the Gahlok and Kohrok appeared and formed their own Kaita. It was really scary—a bulky thing, bristling with three kinds of hand shields. It fired a ferocious blast of combined power at Toa Nuva Kaita Wairuha. It wasn’t long before the three Toa were thrown out of the Kaita, who was unable to sustain his unity at the brunt of such intense energy.As I finished relating this story to Jala, Toa Onua and Toa Pohatu emerged from the jungle, talking rapidly. When they saw us, we told them Toa Tahu wanted to get everyone together. They brought us along, using their Kakama in short bursts for safety, and we headed for Le-Wahi. A Le-Koronan sitting in a tree picking fruit told us where to find Toa Tahu, adding that he had seen the other three not long before.As we walked, Toa Pohatu and Toa Onua managed to thoroughly annoy the impatient Fire Toa by promising him a story as soon as they found the others. But to his credit, Toa Tahu forced himself to keep his cool. Finally we stumbled onto the Wairuha group. Toa Lewa started in on a lengthy, detailed description of the fight with the Kal Kaita, but Toa Kopaka cut him off and summarized it thus: “We merged into Wairuha. Three Bohrok-Kal formed their own Kaita. They beat us.”Toa Lewa echoed my thoughts that Toa Kopaka would not make a very good Chronicler. But of course he’s an awesome hero, so no one expects him to be.Then Toa Pohatu told (with considerably more detail) about the encounter he and Toa Onua had just had with the Tahnok-Kal. For the first time, they actually succeeded in yanking the krana out of a Kal! They had taken a round stone and polished it to a brilliant sheen. Toa Onua jumped out in front of the creature and taunted it. Then Toa Pohatu kicked the shiny ball right in front of the Kal as it fired at his brother. The electrical energy was reflected off the surface of the stone, hitting the tree behind the Bohrok, which fell onto it with a crash. As the Kal writhed to get free, the Toa jumped in and grabbed its krana.Three things really impressed me about this story. The first was how ingenious the plan was. They had figured out an amazing way to use the Kal’s own power against it. The second was how much trust Toa Onua had, to dance in front of such a powerful enemy while Toa Pohatu lined up the shot. The third was the amount of precision it must have taken to kick that ball—just the right angle and speed to put it in front of the Kal, deflecting the blast away from Toa Onua and hitting something as narrow as a tree trunk. I suppose this combination of clever thinking, total trust, and dead-on accuracy were the reasons why their scheme actually worked, whereas the Toa had failed so many times before.But unfortunately the krana told them it was too late. It must have been really creepy to see a krana speak, much less to hear the news it was telling. As Toa Tahu had guessed, the Kal had learned where Cahdok and Gahdok were trapped. Worse yet, the two Toa turned around to find that the Tahnok-Kal had vanished. Apparently a Va had resupplied it while they were talking to the captured krana. Then Turaga Nokama told them the Bohrok had received some sort of signal and were marching back to their nests.The Toa picked up their pace. As they walked, they discussed the problem of getting into the lair, which had been blocked with rocks, and decided they would have to use their new Kanohi somehow. And then there was the question of how to stop the Kal. Toa Kopaka finally spoke, reminding the others of the Exo-Toa armor they had used to fight the Bahrag before. It had hindered their elemental powers, but of course that was no longer an issue at this point. With renewed hope, the Toa changed to their Kakama, and we raced to the tunnel opening.To everyone’s amazement, the rocks had been blasted away. Actually, it wasn’t much of a surprise, considering what the Kal were capable of doing, but we were startled nonetheless. Mostly, it gave us an uncomfortable warning that the creatures were already well on their way to their goal.The Toa agreed that Toa Lewa, the stealthiest of the six, would go down into the tunnel to investigate. It was a long, nervous, uncomfortable wait. The others exchanged anxious glances and paced restlessly on the surface until he popped back up out of the opening so abruptly that we all jumped.In his tangled treespeak, Toa Lewa related that the Exo-Toa were still down there in the lair, and they were fighting the Kal—on their own! Mere machines had somehow reacted to the potential danger. I remember hearing Toa Tahu remark at one point that the armor had responded uncannily well to his commands, almost as if it was learning from him. Perhaps when it sensed the proximity of the same set of intruders, it started following its occupants’ last orders. But sadly, it was getting torn apart by the overwhelming destructive power of the Bohrok-Kal. Well, the Toa lost no time getting down there. Now Jala and I paced on the surface, waiting for the news, good or ill. Puku could sense my worry, and she whimpered fearfully until Jala yelled at her to shut up.If anyone ever reads this journal besides me, he already knows that the Toa won, so I won’t drag out the suspense here. But I have to say that we were truly terrified. The thought that the mighty Exo-Toa armor, the last hope of the powerless Toa, was getting ripped to pieces before they could even get into it was really discouraging. We expected swarms of devastating mechanical drones to erupt out of the ground at any minute, signaling the final defeat of the brave heroes of Mata Nui. Soon every natural feature and every life form we depended on for food and building materials would be leveled, incinerated, flooded, or buried—and it was doubtful we Matoran would even survive long enough to see our world come to a cataclysmic end.“Takua,” Jala began, “whatever happens here, I just want you to know that you’ve really been a great friend. I never thought a half-crazed, daydreaming wanderer would—”His voice faded out as Gali’s vision filled my mind. I saw the Toa arrayed around the Kal, who were inserting the Toa’s symbols into a glowing cube in the middle of the chamber. The Kal were ranting about how they would unlock the prison and allow the mission to resume—apparently the symbols served as some kind of key. The Bahrag, half-hidden in shadow, were already crowing joyously at the prospect of their freedom.The Toa’s masks were twisted with tension and anguish. But then Toa Tahu’s began to change, into a shape I had never seen before. It covered half his face, with holes in both sides, and a bright orange color. I watched in astonishment as he declared, “I call on the Great Mask of Time.”Well, the other Toa were as surprised as I was, but there was no time to ask questions. The Kal’s movements became slower and slower until they seemed almost frozen in time. The Toa rushed forward to retrieve their symbols. But a silvery shield still managed to form around the Kal, and they couldn’t approach, despite Toa Tahu’s obvious strain at wielding such incredible power. Toa Onua hurled a rock at the Kal, and it bounced harmlessly off the shieldOur heroes seemed to lose all hope at this point. Even with an unheard-of new power at their disposal, they couldn’t seem to prevent these creatures from moving, ever so slowly, toward their goal of releasing the Bahrag queens. But then Toa Gali’s voice, clear and positive, broke the ominous silence. “If the essence of our power is housed in those symbols, maybe we can use that against the Bohrok-Kal!”I was as confused as Toa Tahu, who seemed to need all his extra strength just to ask a one-word question: “How?”Toa Gali explained that maybe they could reach out to their symbols and send the power into the Kal, overloading them with energy. Since it was the only thing anyone could think of, they surrounded the Bohrok and held up their arms. Soon a surge of power was circulating among the creatures. It was working! But would it defeat them, or simply give them twice as much destructive energy with which to ravage our island?It’s hard to describe what happened next, exactly. Lots of blasting and flashes, mostly. The Kal started to glow strangely, as they gloated over their newfound power. But it was tearing them apart. The Bahrag snarled angrily, calling them fools. And, indeed, it was clear they had failed in their mission. The Gahlok-Kal got clobbered by flying pieces of Exo-Toa armor as its magnetic force became too great for it to control. The Kohrok-Kal reduced itself to a quivering pile of parts with its overwhelming sonic energy. The Pahrak-Kal melted through the floor and fell to some uncertain doom deep inside the earth. The Nuhvok-Kal imploded, its inexorable gravity pulling itself into a tiny speck of dense matter that followed the Pahrak down into the floor. The Tahnok-Kal was trapped in its own web of lightning, shorting out its own control circuits until its dazed krana tumbled out and it lurched to a lifeless halt. And the Lehvak-Kal’s vacuum pulled it upward, shooting it through the roof of the cave.At this point I woke to see Jala shaking me. “Takua! Look!” he gasped, pointing up into the sky. “It—it—”I followed his finger and saw a tiny dot disappearing into the clouds. “The Lehvak-Kal?” I asked, and he nodded. There was a jagged hole a few bios away from us where it had roared out of the ground. Puku was hiding behind a rock.I quickly told Jala what had happened. He leaped for joy and gave me a big hug. I squeezed him like I would never let him go. Puku ran over and licked us both.The top of an ice staircase appeared inside the hole, and soon the Toa were climbing out, blinking in the brilliant sunshine. They sank to the ground with relief. Toa Gali turned around to look at us. “Chronicler! Jala! We did it!” she exclaimed. “Did you get my vision?”“I saw it,” I grinned. “You Toa were amazing!”“It was Gali’s idea,” said Toa Kopaka, looking at her admiringly. I stared at him for a moment, because I had never seen that expression on his mask before.“The Bohrok-Kal are defeated. The Bahrag are still imprisoned. And the Bohrok swarms are asleep in their nests again. A job well done!” proclaimed Toa Pohatu.“But we have never come closer to defeat, Pohatu,” added Toa Gali thoughtfully. “I think perhaps we all have a great deal to think about.” She glanced uneasily at Toa Tahu, whose bright red Hau Nuva had replaced the powerful mask he had used a few minutes before.Toa Tahu agreed. “Of course. I think we’ve finally learned our lesson.”Everyone guessed at the lesson. I thought Toa Lewa’s guess was most accurate: “Only bad-yuck things happen underground.” But of course Toa Tahu meant that with unity, duty, and destiny at the forefront of their minds, the Toa Nuva were capable of overcoming any threat to the safety of our beloved island.Well, there’s the moral of the story. Now, I’m going to get some sleep before the party tonight. Because I don’t want to nod off while I’m telling Nixie all about this stuff. I’ll probably find plenty of other ways to embarrass myself without that happening.End of Part I Part II: PeacetimeIf you would like to post comments, please do so in GaliGee's Stories or the review topic for Part II.

Summer 2 : 1Finally, the full moon! As I write tonight, my lightstone is almost unnecessary. I love it when that silvery orb floods the land with its pale, gentle glow. The light almost looks liquid. It’s as beautiful as water, the loveliest of the elements, but you can immerse yourself in it without getting that unpleasant feeling of being wet.I flipped back in my book just now and realized that the first night of this trip there was a full moon. So we’ve been all the way around the island in less than twenty days, and tonight we’re next to the Fau Swamp, almost a third of the way. I wonder if the Kal are going to lead us in a circle again.This morning we set out for the swamp to get those two Kakama. As the jungle thinned, the going got much easier, although we had to watch our step to stay out of wet spots. The Nuhvok-Kal had abandoned its effort to slow us down, probably because there weren’t many trees or big rocks to pile up, and we could just go around them, anyway. After a couple of kios of riding Puku, I put my pack on her and walked beside her, because it was easier than trying to keep my balance as she lurched across the marsh.Well, Matoran evidently aren’t the only ones to enjoy roast meat and jungle fruits, because soon a huge Kuna surged up out of the muck and lunged at the pack. Puku reared up and snapped at it with her claws. Then Jala dove at the bog snake, whipping out his knife as he grabbed it. They rolled away, and after a brief struggle, Jala rose, dripping with mud, holding up the dead snake in triumph. Puku trotted over and rubbed him appreciatively with her eye stalks. He looked at her uneasily, then patted her head.I thanked my friend for his brave rescue of my crab. She probably could have defended herself without too much trouble, but it was still really nice of him to do it. “Aw, it was nothing,” he shrugged.“You should have been built as a Toa,” I remarked.Jala grinned and gestured at Toa Tahu and Toa Lewa. “You know, following those two around would pretty good training in being a Toa, if it were possible get promoted. Say, do you know how to cook these things?” He handed me the Kuna. I laughed, assured him it would be the best snake he’d ever eaten, and strapped the limp creature to Puku’s back. I had never cooked a Kuna, but how hard could it be? Wrap it around a stick, add a pinch of herbs, sear it over a hot fire… almost anything is good roasted like that.Jala brushed off some of the slime, and we resumed our journey. But my mind was still lingering on what he had said. I remembered when Toa Tahu had arrived on Mata Nui, bristling with barely-contained power and almost completely clueless as to his purpose. After he freed himself from the trap the Guard had built to ensnare infected Rahi, the first thing he would have done—had Turaga Vakama not knelt in front of him in obvious submission—was incinerate Jala and his troops! He had some instinctive knowledge of his mission, but without any coherent memories, he had to rely on Turaga Vakama to supply information about village life, the Great Spirit and his evil brother, and so on. I promised myself that if we survived to enjoy peace someday, I would ask each Toa about his thoughts and experiences, and add that to the Wall of History. Come to think of it, I’ll ask the same thing of the Turaga. Except that knowing them, they’ll probably leave all the good parts shrouded in mystery.The two Toa switched to their Akaku and began to scan carefully for masks as they picked their way through the wetland. They stopped at one point, noting that a second set of Kal tracks had joined the first. “Well, at least we aren’t just stuck with that same annoying gravity monster,” remarked Toa Tahu.“Yes, now we’ll have double the fun-joy,” replied Toa Lewa, rolling his eyes. “I wonder which one it is.” He soon had his answer, as there were random burn marks in the clumps of reeds. Toa Tahu said that maybe it was the Pahrak-Kal, and it was looking for krana. Or Kanohi. They resumed their search. Jala and I helped them look, with the shared mask power.Presently Jala spotted something, but it wasn’t a mask. It was a krana-kal! He called to the rest of us as he fished around in the swampy water for it. We were all so fascinated that for a moment we forgot to look behind us. Toa Lewa glanced over his shoulder and yelled, “Down-dive!” The Pahrak-Kal was soaring rapidly over the marshy terrain toward us.Jala, Puku, and I scattered. Toa Tahu turned and activated his Hau, and the creature bounced off the shield. Toa Tahu gripped his swords in his left hand and threw himself onto the Bohrok, and they struggled in the mud, his right hand slipping off the slimy headplate. Toa Lewa jumped into the fray, also groping for the Kal’s krana, but then the Bohrok managed to raise its hand shields and fire a ferocious plasma blast at the ground. Both Toa went flying, along with a considerable amount of muck.Toa Tahu scrambled to his feet and changed to his Akaku. Crouching behind a clump of reeds, I gasped as I saw the brightly glowing krana-kal right at my feet. I picked it up and tossed it to Toa Lewa, who had landed next to me and was still on all fours. He reached out to grab it. As the Bohrok charged him, he hiked the krana between his legs to Toa Tahu. The enraged Kal tried to pivot but slipped in the mud, landing heavily on top of me. I groaned as it crushed me into the muck, stepping on my back as it struggled to find its footing. Then it used its krana-kal Su to help it leap free of the sucking mud. It dodged Jala's flying disk and headed right for Toa Tahu. Its hand shields fired a focused, searing blast at his chest, and he collapsed into the swamp. The Kal plucked the krana from his hand and ambled away toward higher ground.I ran to Toa Tahu. He was groaning and trying to sit up. Then Jala called, “Toa Lewa! Look out!”I looked up. The Toa of Air had put himself squarely in the path of the Pahrak-Kal. And right next to him was the Nuhvok-Kal! Ignoring the Nuhvok, he lunged at the Pahrak with his katana. It tossed the krana to its ally and directed a fiery blast at Toa Lewa. But the Toa sprang up, twisting his body out of the way of the plasma beam. He changed from his Mahiki to his Miru, caught the krana in mid-air, and landed where the phantom Nuhvok-Kal had been standing.Jala and I stared in astonishment. Toa Tahu staggered toward them and Jala hurled his disk again as the enraged creature, muttering curses and threats, shot another burst of plasma. Toa Lewa dodged it with a back flip. But the Kal anticipated his next move, catching him in the middle of a jump, and the green Toa fell, limp, onto the ground. Once more the Pahrak-Kal took the krana. It hissed, “Your hopes of stopping the Kal are as insubstantial as the illusions with which you torment us. You will regret your impertinence!”The Nuhvok-Kal was watching from the top of a low hill. It shot a gravity beam at Toa Tahu, Jala, and me, throwing us into the mud. Again. As the two Kal, trotted away, the brown one remarked, “You were right, Nuhvok-Kal. The Toa are arrogant pests. If our mission did not require complete focus, it would be a pleasure to eliminate them from the face of the island.”The gravity blast had been of relatively low strength—an insult rather than an injury. We pushed ourselves up, ran to Toa Lewa, and asked if he was all right. Toa Lewa rolled over and grinned. “Yeah. Look-see what I almost hard-fell onto.” He held up two Kakama, one nested inside the other. “That plasma-bug was so bluster-mad, it ran right past them without even seeing them.”Toa Tahu smiled as he accepted one of the Kakama. “Thanks, brother! Now I just have to ask Vakama about the Miru, and I’ll have them all. And at least we made that vermin work for its krana.”Jala helped Toa Lewa up. We all jumped back as a red blur appeared in our midst, and Toa Pohatu and two Ta-Koronan guardsmen, Jiko and Mekahu, emerged. “Oh, hello, Pohatu,” said Toa Tahu. The guardsmen saluted Jala, and he saluted back.Toa Pohatu cocked his head. “Nice color scheme, guys,” he quipped. We all looked at each other and ourselves. Every single one of us was covered head to toe with mud, and we were as brown as the Toa of Stone. Toa Lewa started to laugh, and then Toa Tahu and Toa Pohatu joined him, and finally we Matoran did, too.“We had a bit of Kal hard-luck. But we found these,” explained Toa Lewa, holding up his Kakama.“Excellent! Now all you need is Gali—with her powers—to clean you up. And maybe she could help with those nasty burns,” said Toa Pohatu sympathetically, pointing to Toa Tahu’s chest. Through gaps in the mud, I could see scorch marks on his ribs.“I don’t need Gali’s help,” muttered Toa Tahu, his jaw clenched. “I would just as soon never see another drop of water in my life.”Toa Pohatu stepped back a bit, surprised by the vehemence of the reply. “Well, I can’t say I’m particular to water, either. But speaking of Gali, I found these little fellows heading your direction, so I gave them a ride. They’ve got a message for you.”Jiko stepped hesitantly forward. “Toa Gali requests that you come help her with something. She didn’t say what it was. She’ll be waiting at the Kini Nui.”Toa Tahu groaned. “Well, I suppose if I refuse, she’ll say that I’m not a team player.” He looked up at the sky. “I’ve got a Kakama now, so it won’t take me long to get there. So I’d rather rest for a moment, and have something to eat first.” He looked at himself and sighed. “And I suppose I should clean myself up.”Toa Lewa led us to a part of the swamp where the water was clear. We stepped in and washed off the smelly slime. When we got out, we saw that the guardsmen had started a fire. I opened the muddy pack and removed some of the leftovers from our last meal. Mehaku’s eyes lit up. “I’ve always heard they ate well in Le-Wahi!” he exclaimed. “Now I see the rumors are true.”Jala smiled at him. “I’ll see that you get put on a jungle detail next rotation.”“Thanks, Captain,” grinned Mehaku.Jiko watched me wrap the Kuna around a stick “Are we gonna EAT that?” he asked nervously.“Sure! It’s meat. Why not?” I laughed. The snake turned out to be surprisingly good. Puku ate an extra helping.After dinner we rested a bit while the Toa caught up on current events. I told the Ta-Koronans how Jala had killed the Kuna, and they were impressed. Then Toa Tahu got up and stretched. “Well, I’d better get going,” he remarked.Toa Pohatu and Toa Lewa took their leave, changed to their Kakama, and vanished. The guardsmen left for Ta-Koro, and Jala, Puku, and I prepared to follow our Toa to his meeting with the Toa of Water. I wondered about his repeated grumblings. In the past, he had always been very friendly to her. Whenever the Toa were together, he always managed somehow to end up standing beside her. But ever since they had become Nuva, he was clearly bothered by the very thought of Gali. Was it still this argument about him splitting up the Toa?As I cleaned and folded my knife, I asked Toa Tahu, “Do you think you and Toa Gali will ever —”“No!” he snapped.I cleared my throat and added timidly, “Well, what I was going to say was, will you ever make peace with each other?”Toa Tahu laughed, embarrassed. “Takua, it doesn’t matter how Gali and I feel about one another. We Toa can’t allow ourselves to have strong emotions about anyone, good or bad, because that would really affect how we work together.”It seemed to me that he definitely had strong emotions about at least two of the other Toa, and that had already caused some problems. But who was I to tell him how to do his job? I smiled at him instead. “Well, everything is packed.”“Good.” He switched to his new Kakama. “Let’s go, then.”Thanks to the Great Mask of Speed, we arrived in a few minutes at the Kini-Nui. It would have taken us the rest of the day to get there without it.As we slowed down at the edge of the magnificent temple, we heard voices. Toa Gali was saying, “As soon as one other arrives, I will explain.”Toa Kopaka replied, “Another? Who?”Toa Tahu vaulted onto the stone platform, and Jala and I scrambled up after him. “It is I, Toa of cold breezes!” he announced cheerfully. “You can go back to your snow fortress. I am sure Gali and I can handle matters.”“Perhaps,” replied the Toa of Ice, “if all Gali needs is water boiled.”We Matoran started to laugh at their banter, but as we reached the top and they came into view, we realized from their expressions that it was not in good humor.“I sent for both of you!” snapped Toa Gali. “Tahu, kindly stop acting like you are Mata Nui’s gift to us all. Kopaka, for a Toa of few words, you never seem to know when to be quiet.”Jala and I looked at each other and knew what the other was thinking. With the Toa squabbling like this, we’d better just stay out of the way.Toa Gali informed the others that they were to find some masks, and, in the process, gave them a short speech about unity. “Or do we let our pride do to the Toa what Makuta could not?” she finished.Toa Tahu and Toa Kopaka frowned at each other for a moment. Finally the Toa of Fire uncrossed his arms and said, “Very well. Lead the way, sister.”They jumped off the temple platform, and we climbed down after them. Toa Gali set off at a brisk pace toward the saddleback of rugged foothills that separate the Mangai from Mount Ihu. “I wonder why they’re not using their Kakama,” whispered Jala.“Say, Gali, why don’t we use my Kakama? I happen to have one now,” said Toa Tahu.“Me, too,” muttered Toa Kopaka.“I’ve got mine, too, remember?” asked Gali. “But I don’t think it would be wise to use them. Where we’re going, we’re going to need to use caution.”“Well, there you go,” I whispered back to Jala. He nodded.“Lewa and I found them together,” continued Toa Tahu. “It was quite an adventure. You see, the Nuhvok-Kal was ahead of us, and we figured it was after the masks, too. So we got the Le-Koronans to help us set up a trap.”Toa Kopaka groaned and looked away. Toa Gali glanced at Toa Tahu, but she said nothing.“So, I ran ahead to lure the Kal back into the trap. I jumped right in front of it and waved my swords. It raised its hand shields to blast me, but I was already long gone. Then…”Well, I won’t repeat Toa Tahu’s whole story, because it was so long-winded, even Toa Lewa would have been impressed. And I just wrote the whole thing down yesterday, anyway.Finally, Toa Tahu finished his tale. “After that, finding the masks was a simple matter.” I noticed that he left out the part about being thrown into the mud by the Pahrak-Kal and the Nuhvok-Kal. But I wasn’t about to bring it up.“So you have said,” Toa Gali remarked.Toa Kopaka called his story “whistling past Makuta’s lair,” an appropriate use for “hot air.” At this point Toa Tahu reached for his swords, and Toa Gali stepped in to stop what could have been an ugly fight. She announced that we had arrived at our destination, anyway.Toa Kopaka seemed to know this area. He called it the “place of shadow” and explained that even the Bohrok stayed away from it. In my travels I once came to this pass through the mountains. The wind had been unnaturally chilly, and strange patterns of shadow and light had struck fear in my heart. I had quickly moved on my way.“Perhaps the Matoran should wait for us here,” suggested Toa Gali.Jala started to object, but I pointed out that Toa Gali could send me a vision if anything noteworthy happened. She smiled and patted my shoulder. “Indeed. There’s no need to endanger yourselves.” I nodded vigorously, and the other Toa agreed. So they set off, hiking up the narrow, winding path while we sat on a rock outcrop to rest.About half an hour after they left, Puku started to get restless. Then huge storm clouds rolled in. Lightning ripped through the sky, striking some cliffs in the direction the Toa had taken. The rumble of a landslide joined the booming voice of the thunder. Jala sat up with alarm. My sight faded to black for a moment, and then I saw an image of the Toa in their Pakari, desperately batting away huge stones with their tools. Then the vision was over. I shouted to Jala over the noise, and he nodded nervously.Finally, the storm subsided. “Did they make it?” he asked.“I don’t know,” I replied. We sat in silence for a few minutes.“I hate not knowing,” he muttered.I agreed. “It’s almost as unsettling as this place. How about a game of Juma-Juvo?”Once again, the game took our minds off our worries. We gathered stones and scratched lines in the dirt. Then Jala proceeded to wallop me.“Takua, you should really think before you move your pieces,” he chided me as he wiped out an entire row of my tokens to finish the game. “If you had put this one over here on your last turn, you could have prevented me from doing this, and you could even have taken that one over there.”I nodded. “Well, it’s a good thing you’re in charge of the Guard, and not me.”At this moment, another vision came to me. My relief that the Toa were alive immediately turned to anxiety again as I realized they were standing between two walls of solid flame. They changed to their Kakama, clasped hands, and raced forward through one of them. Then Toa Gali did something really surprising, considering how much she dislikes heat. She turned around and put her hand right into the fire. And even more surprising was the fact that when she pulled it out, it wasn’t burned. “It’s not real. None of it. It’s a trick,” she said. The others tried it, too. “Makuta,” murmured Toa Tahu.Jala looked at me, wide-eyed, as I related what had happened. “Illusions of the Dark Spirit!” he cried, jumping up. “What are we waiting for? If those things aren’t real, we can follow the Toa!”“But they told us to wait here,” I protested.“Come on, Takua. Since when have you started being hesitant to bend the rules?”“Since I heard that You-Know-Who is involved,” I replied with a shudder. “What if some of that WAS real?”“Oh, so now you’re wiser than Toa Gali,” he scoffed. “Let’s go! Besides, I’m getting tired of beating you at Juma-Juvo.”I laughed nervously. “All right. But if we get in trouble, this was your idea.”“Agreed.” We set off, following the steep, rocky trail. The going was slow and difficult, especially when we reached an area strewn with huge boulders. Jala stooped to study one of them. “I’m no expert on stone,” he remarked, “but it looks to me like these were just broken. Makuta’s illusions are awfully realistic.”I was suddenly reminded of the time when Toa Pohatu had gotten me to help him shoot rocks at the Nui-Jaga’s nest in the Quarry, the source of the infected koli balls that almost wiped out Po-Koro. I had just been to see Huki, and I was horrified to find the star athlete so weak and feverish, tossing restlessly on his bed. Even in his delirious state, he was more worried about Maku than about himself. Anyway, I stopped to talk to the comet salesman in the Po-Koro marketplace, and I stumbled over a strange object with the water symbol carved on it. It looked vaguely familiar. Then, as I was walking away, I remembered that the statues in the Quarry had keyholes like that. I slipped behind him and took the key. After I managed to unlock Toa Gali’s statue, I crept inside to look around. The horrible stench of infection—just like in poor Huki’s hut—made me realize I was onto something. I almost fainted with fright when a Nui-Jaga skittered out of the shadows and shook its stinger at me. I ran back and told Turaga Onewa, and he must have gotten the message to Toa Pohatu right away, because the Toa of Stone showed up at the Quarry just after I did. It was the first time I had seen anyone use a Kakama, and he startled me almost as badly as the scorpion had.Well, as everyone has heard, Toa Pohatu got hit in the face with venom right away. But even though he was temporarily blinded, he wasn’t about to give up. In an unexpectedly calm and gentle voice, he asked me to help him aim. I stood behind him, gripping his elbows, and pointed him toward the pillars supporting the nest. I was astonished at the force with which he could kick those rocks. He brought the whole thing down in a few minutes. And then he spoke to me as if I was just as much of a hero as he was. Whenever I feel down or lonely, I think back on how Toa Pohatu inspired me that day. I can only imagine how grateful Huki was to see his smiling mask and hear his words of hope.Oh, the reason I brought up this little story was to talk about the smell of the fractured stone. The air around Jala and me was full of dust, and it smelled just like it did when the Jaga’s nest collapsed. So I started to have my doubts about this theory that the landslide was an illusion. “You’re right, Jala. These rocks are real! We should turn back.”“Maybe they are real, but they’re not falling now.” Jala scaled the rocks and kept walking, so Puku and I tagged along behind him.Sure enough, after we had trekked for a few more kios, we reached the wall of flame. I could feel its warmth as we cautiously approached. “Just keep in mind that it’s not real,” Jala urged me.“I’m not about to just walk into that thing. I’m going to experiment first,” I said warily. I extended my hand. Waves of heat radiated off the bizarre phenomenon. I clenched my jaw and plunged my fist into it. Immediately a sensation of searing pain enveloped my hand. I yanked it back out.Jala frowned at me. “You have to believe it’s not real. You can’t test it to see if it is or not,” he explained. “If you have any doubt whatsoever, it’s going to burn you.” He stuck his own hand into the fire and held it there.I took a deep breath and told myself that if Jala could do it, it must not be real. Then I put my hand back in the flames. It stayed cool. I laughed out loud. “That’s amazing! Makuta’s illusions are only as strong as our fear!”Puku refused to be convinced. But after I walked into the middle of the wall and stood there, the fire vanished, presumably because there were no sentient beings left that believed in it. Then Puku shook her eye stalks and followed me.Twilight was enfolding the rocky shapes of the mountain in purple shadows, transforming them into sinister-looking figures. “Should we stop for the night?” I asked Jala. I was looking forward to the security and warmth of a campfire.“Let’s see if we can catch up with the Toa and camp with them,” he suggested.We quickened our pace, scrambling over the uneven terrain. I tripped and fell a couple of times trying to keep up with Jala, who is in much better shape from his guard training. Puku offered me her back, so I got on. As Jala disappeared from sight around a large rock outcrop, darkness closed in around me—but not the kind that happens at sunset. This blackness was sudden and complete, as if a thick blanket had been thrown over my head. Puku stopped in her tracks. I caught my breath and clutched her shell.Cautiously, Puku probed ahead of her with her claw. At least, I think that’s what she was doing, judging by the movements under me. I groped in my pack for my lightstone. Finally I felt it between my fingers, and I pulled it out with relief, expecting a flood of golden light to drive back the darkness.But the lightstone was a dark, inert rock in my hand. Now I was really scared. “Jala?” I called frantically.No reply came back. I started to panic. Puku was shuffling slowly ahead, using her claws to feel her way along the path. But all I wanted to do was turn back—if I could figure out which way that was! I clutched the useless lightstone, wondering if Makuta was behind this darkness. He had to be. What else could do this?Then I could smell smoke drifting toward me. Was the forest on fire? I hoped that the blaze would at least illuminate the way, so I could die in the light. But then Puku lurched sideways around a big rock, and rays of light came around it from the other side. The darkness completely subsided behind me, leaving only the softly muted shadows of dusk.And right in front of me was the Toa’s campfire. Jala turned and said, “Oh, there you are. Come on over and have some supper, Takua.”Toa Gali studied me intently as I slid weakly off Puku’s back. “What’s wrong, Chronicler?”“I, well, there was a strange patch of darkness back there,” I stammered. “Jala, didn’t you see it?”“No,” he shrugged. “But since you’re afraid of the dark—”“I’m not afraid of the dark!” I protested. “I just don’t like it.”Toa Tahu beckoned me with his hand. “Well, come sit by the fire, then, little one. Fire always brings light.”Toa Gali handed me some dried meat and a cluster of berries, and I nodded my thanks. Famished, I ate the berries in one mouthful. Then I noticed that the Toa were just watching me and Jala eat, and not speaking to each other. Every now and then I would catch Toa Tahu glaring across the fire at Toa Gali, or up at Toa Kopaka, who was sitting high on a rock keeping watch. He didn’t look at anyone. He just gazed off into the distance.Finally Toa Tahu lay down next to the fire. Toa Gali chose a spot as far away from him as possible. I can see their eyes glowing softly in the dark now, glancing distrustfully at each other from time to time. Whatever they were arguing about before Jala and I showed up must have been pretty serious.With the uneasy feeling of the place of shadows, and the uncomfortable way the Toa are getting along, I’m not very sleepy, in spite of the long, difficult walk. That’s probably why I’ve filled my journal with so much pointless detail tonight. I guess I’ve been putting off sleep because I’m really afraid I’ll have nightmares about Makuta’s darkness. But that’s a risk I’ve got to take. Now that my nice full moon has been obscured by clouds, I might as well close my eyes, anyway. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Summer 1 : 18We left Ta-Koro this morning with new mask locations for Toa Tahu, a new disk for me, and new energy for all of us. Jala, in particular, had an extra spring in his step.Toa Tahu told us he would first find the Kaukau Nuva hidden in the Kalala Lava Cave. Then we would head for Le-Wahi to retrieve the two Kakama in the Fau Swamp. “As soon as I get one of those, things will go much faster,” he promised us. “Say, maybe I should bring Lewa along, and he can have the other one.”We climbed the many ridges of jagged volcanic rock up to the lava cave. By the time we arrived, it was afternoon. Toa Tahu stuck his head in the cavern and took a good look around. The cave had been exposed when a large portion of the Mangai’s cone collapsed from the destructive action of a swarm of Pahrak-Kal. Before he lost his powers, Toa Tahu had brought a party of us Matoran up there to surf it one day. While we zoomed around close to the mouth of the cave, the Toa of Fire had ridden his new magma-sword lava board deep inside the opening, all the way to the fissure where the lava surged straight from the core of the volcano. He had come back and told us all about the amazing view, looking into the very heart of the Mangai.But today Toa Tahu was much more cautious. Not only had he lost his control over the lava, but the incident with the Pahrak-Kal had taught him that he had no more resistance to heat, either. He stepped onto his board and tested his surfing abilities without his elemental power. Jala and I didn’t have our boards, so we just watched. Toa Tahu still did a lot better at it than we Matoran could have because of his strength and agility, but I could tell he was pretty frustrated he couldn’t surf like he used to.After a few trial runs, he hauled his board out of the lava. “I have to say,” he admitted, “I have new admiration for you Matoran, surfing on lava with no powers.” Then he turned back to the cave and muttered, mostly to himself, “What ridiculous irony that I have to surf over my element, which I no longer control, to get a mask that’s only useful in her element.” He rested for a moment before he gathered his courage and made a run for the opposite side of the cavern.We watched breathlessly as his red figure receded, dark against the glowing yellow-orange fluid. When he reached the far wall, he leaped up onto a low ledge and stopped.Jala pointed, and then I saw the Kaukau Nuva, resting on another ledge a few bios above Toa Tahu’s head. Toa Tahu pulled the swords off his feet and changed to his Pakari. I was so proud I had found it for him! He jammed one of the blades into the stone and tested it before he climbed up and wrapped his legs around it. He reached above his head and thrust the other tool into the wall. Then he carefully pulled himself up and stretched his arm toward the mask.Just as Toa Tahu’s fingers touched the Kanohi, the magma sword suddenly shifted under his weight. The brittle stone had fractured with the force of his blow, and the blade was slipping out of the wall. The Kaukau tumbled off the ledge into the lava flow. Toa Tahu grabbed desperately for his sword, catching it as he fell onto the lower one. Fortunately, it held.Jala and I glanced at each other in horror. He quickly pulled his disk off his back and hurled it at the mask, knocking it toward the edge of the stream, where it lodged against some rocks jutting into the lava. The bamboo disk, floating on the magma, burst into flames. I glanced back at Toa Tahu as I handed Jala my disk, since he’s a much better shot than I am. But he didn’t need to throw it, because Toa Tahu had changed to his Matatu, and the dripping mask was flying through the air toward him. He spun it in the air above his head to fling off the fiery fluid before reaching up and grabbing it with his hand. Judging from the look on his face, it was still quite hot.Toa Tahu stepped backwards into the lava as he wrenched his other blade out of the wall, but finally he managed to make it back across to us. Through the pain of the burns on his hand and foot, he gave us a tense smile. “I can’t wait to get my fire back.”Soon we were on our way toward Le-Wahi. As we walked, I wondered aloud whether Toa Tahu couldn’t have retrieved the Kaukau with his Matatu in the first place, and avoided all that danger. Jala replied that it was probably too far away, but once he had crossed the lava, he might have been able to get the Kanohi off the ledge without climbing. “Maybe he was being just a little bit stubborn,” Jala added in a low voice. “But any challenge is good training for a Toa.” I glanced at Toa Tahu’s broad back as he walked ahead of us, and I wondered what it would be like to live life doing things the hard way on purpose. Life is tough enough as it is! The Toa must really care about us, to put themselves through what they do. Late that afternoon, I had another vision from Toa Gali. This time, she wasn’t the one in trouble. It was Toa Lewa. In the vision, she and Toa Kopaka ran to his aid in the jungle. He was clutching the sides of his head and rolling around in agony. I couldn’t hear what they were saying to him, but finally Toa Lewa sat up and answered them. It seemed to me that perhaps he had tangled with the Kohrak-Kal. I winced as I remembered how much my head hurt after hearing its overwhelming blast of sonic energy.Toa Tahu listened to my account with a frown on his face. “That vicious monster!” he hissed. “And what are Kopaka and Gali doing in Le-Wahi?” He stood up and began to march again, his pace quickened with anger. Jala, Puku, and I scrambled after him.Finally, by the time we made it to the forest, Toa Tahu’s temper seemed to have calmed down. We stopped to camp for the night. I asked Toa Tahu if his burns were better, and he replied that the natural healing process had begun, thank Mata Nui. But I noticed he was sitting farther back from the fire than usual.Jala has watch duty, so off to sleep I go.Summer 1 : 19This morning started out like all the others—just more hiking. But things got interesting fast. First, we ran across a set of Kal tracks. By now even I can tell them from regular Bohrok tracks, because the Kal are much heavier. Toa Tahu pivoted on his heel and began to follow them immediately.“What about the Kakama, Toa Tahu?” I asked, trotting along to keep up with him. I had really been looking forward to him getting that mask. Even with Puku there, I was still doing a lot of walking, because I felt guilty about Jala not having a ride. Puku was big enough to carry us both, but it was a bit crowded on her shell, and Jala didn’t much like to ride her. Besides, she couldn’t keep up with Toa Tahu for long with both of us on her back.“It can wait,” muttered the Toa of Fire.Jala looked at me and shrugged, and we kept after him. The Kal led us back toward Ta-Wahi again. We left the last traces of the jungle behind by mid-morning.As we crested the next ridge, we came upon a large swarm of Tahnok. Two Ta-Koronans were supervising them as they blasted apart a series of dams across a lava stream, which had probably been put there by some Pahrak or Kohrak. Toa Tahu stopped and studied them for a moment. Then he walked over to the Matoran and told them he needed the Tahnok for a mission. The villagers bowed deferentially.Jala frowned. “What’s he got in mind?”It was my turn to shrug. Toa Tahu summoned the Tahnok, and they gathered around him as he explained and gestured. Without their krana, the Bohrok are pretty docile, but they aren’t particularly smart. They understand only simple instructions, so you have to break things down into very basic tasks for them. “Follow me,” he ordered them. “I will point to a creature, and you will attack it with your fire power.”This was a bizarre thought, indeed. Toa Tahu was going to wield the power of fire again—but through former enemies, against their own allies! If the Tahnok had still had krana, this would have been impossible, of course. But without them, they were machines for anyone to command. I shook my head in wonder at this irony.But Jala was not so enthusiastic about Toa Tahu’s genius. “I’ve got a bad feeling about this, Takua,” he whispered. “After seeing the Va back in action to help the Kal, I think this could backfire.”“But the Bohrok need krana to get instructions from the Bahrag, and the Va don’t,” I remarked. “Without krana, the Bohrok have no allegiance to anyone.” “We don’t know that for sure. There could be some kind of fail-safe that prevents them from attacking a Kal,” he retorted. “They might turn on us when we ask them to, and then we’d be facing a Kal AND an angry swarm of Tahnok! It’s just too risky.”I looked at our Toa, who was leading the Tahnok after the footprints. “Well, it is a little weird,” I admitted, “but what are you going to do, challenge Toa Tahu?”Jala’s eyes flashed at me. “Look, Takua. Turaga Vakama didn’t send us with Toa Tahu just so we could come back to the village and tell the story of his defeat. If there’s something we can do, we need to do it!” He strode past the marching Tahnok and tapped the Toa’s arm.Toa Tahu wasn’t convinced, apparently, because he patted Jala on the head and kept right on walking. Jala dropped back and walked with me in grim silence.Well, Jala was right to believe that the plan would fail, but not for the reason he feared. We found the Nuhvok-Kal a few kios away. “Forward, Tahnok, and the day will be ours!” declared Toa Tahu, raising his swords and pointing one at the Kal. The Tahnok lifted their hand shields.The Nuhvok-Kal was unimpressed. “You lead the Tahnok against me, Tahu? You are bits of straw challenging a whirlwind,” it quipped. “A little less gravity, and the swarm ‘flies’ away. They will be safe in orbit—until I need them.” The creature waved its gravity shields, and the Tahnok floated up off the ground. Tumbling and disoriented, their fire flew in all directions. Jala and I ducked behind a rock to avoid their blasts and watched them drift up into the sky, past the clouds.Then the Kal turned to Toa Tahu, who was so distracted by this display of power that he had momentarily taken his eyes off his adversary. “A little more gravity, and you will be too heavy to interfere.” The red Toa slammed into the ground so hard he sank into the solid rock. “We will find the Bahrag queens you imprisoned, Tahu. Defy us at your peril.” Then the Nuhvok-Kal turned around. As it ambled away, I noticed something on its back. On top of Gali’s Nuva symbol, there was a gray Akaku Nuva!I nudged Jala, and he nodded. “You stay here with Toa Tahu and help him up. I’ll follow the Kal and see what it does with that mask.” As I whispered to him to be careful, he crept away behind the creature. They both disappeared behind a hill.I ran to Toa Tahu, who was groaning with pain. I pulled his arm up and dropped it, and it landed with an audible ‘thud.’ I realized I would have to wait until the gravity effect had worn off, so I sat down and wrote in my journal. Now I’m caught up and really bored.I suppose from Jala’s point of view, storytelling is pretty unimportant. He’s a military leader, and his priority is to create legends, not write them. But to me, it’s everything—mainly because I’m not very good at anything else, and I just happen to have a talent for journalism. Even Turaga Vakama says so, and he is notoriously hard to please. He says it’s as vital to document history as it is to study prophecy. If we don’t learn from the heroism and mistakes of those who have walked before us, we’re stumbling through the dark toward uncertain points of light. So I do what I do best, and follow my calling. I’m not any good at leading the way, but it brings me great satisfaction to know that I can light the way for someone else.Well, while I was getting all philosophical about that, I heard a terrifying crash, followed by another, and then another. And then I saw a red streak falling in the distance. Apparently it’s raining Tahnok. Now I think I’ve seen everything.I wonder how Jala is doing. I hope he doesn’t get hit by a falling Bohrok! Is he all right?I got my answer shortly after I wrote that question. Jala came running back, breathless, about the time Toa Tahu was getting up. Jala reported that the Nuhvok-Kal had hidden the Akaku high on a spire of stone. The creature had levitated itself straight up in the air and then pulled itself onto the narrow, flat top and set down the Kanohi there. It lifted an immense boulder from the ground and guided it into place with its hand shields, then let it drop onto the mask. Then it floated back down and went on its way.Toa Tahu rubbed his back and looked at the imprint in the rock he had made when he fell. He shook his head at the sight. Then he thanked Jala for the information on the mask. “Let’s go get it. I hope it’s not smashed. Too bad I don’t have a Miru yet.”We followed Jala to the pinnacle of stone. The sheer height and steepness of the spike were dizzying. Toa Tahu stared at the boulder perched on top, squinting against the afternoon sun. He changed to his Pakari, and I shivered. I hoped he wouldn’t try to jab his swords into the rock again, because that had almost brought disaster last time, and this thing looked too thin to tolerate any cracking.Fortunately, he seemed to have learned from the past. He picked up a huge rock and hurled it with all his might at the spire. It shattered against the monolith about two thirds of the way up and made a fracture in the stone. Encouraged, Toa Tahu picked up another rock. After several misses and a few more blows, the top third of the pinnacle toppled, and the enormous boulder crashed to the ground. Toa Tahu quickly switched to his Matatu, and as soon as he spotted the Akaku tumbling down, he used the noble mask to pull it out of the way so it wouldn’t be crushed. The Great Kanohi landed in his hand, intact.“Excellent!” cried Jala jubilantly. “Whoever made those masks sure made them strong.”Toa Tahu smiled. “Well, at least some good came of that humiliating little incident with the Nuhvok-Kal.” He put on the Akaku and let us see with it as he practiced controlling its power. We saw cracks inside what remained of the spire, and the heat signature of the Kal’s footprints. Then I looked at Toa Tahu and saw some kind of fracture inside his shoulder joint. He noticed me looking, and he put his hand over it. “Don’t worry, that’ll heal,” he assured me. “The Nuhvok-Kal is going to pay dearly, though.”Once again, we set out for Le-Wahi. The tracks were heading that way, and two Kakama were waiting in the Fau Swamp. Toa Tahu thought perhaps the Kal was seeking them, too. “Although with no Turaga, I’m not sure how they know where the masks are,” he mused. “Come to think of it, I’m not sure how the Turaga know where the masks are, either.” He sighed and led us onward.Jala looked at me apologetically. “I’m sorry I insulted your profession, Takua,” he said. “If you chroniclers weren’t writing tales about the brave deeds of our warriors, there would be no new legends to guide us in the future.”“That, and the village fire would be pretty boring. Turaga Vakama would lecture us about duty every night,” I grinned. “It’s all right, Jala. If you warriors weren’t doing brave deeds, I would have nothing to write about.”He laughed and slapped my back. We camped in the exact same spot as we did last night. The only difference is that Toa Tahu has a broken shoulder and an Akaku now, and I’m on watch duty. After I was sure the others were asleep, I told Puku to make sure to keep me awake this time.Summer 1 : 20This time I actually managed to stay awake on guard duty until dawn. When I woke Toa Tahu, I asked him how his shoulder was doing. He showed me with the Akaku. The fracture was mostly healed. “We are wonderfully built,” he remarked, flexing his arm. It still seemed to cause him some discomfort, but it was nowhere near as severe as the day before. “Except for the part about our powers being tied to those accursed symbols.”We set out on the trail of the Nuhvok-Kal, who led us once more toward the jungle. I was getting tired of zigzagging between Ta- and Le-Wahi, but at least the creature wasn’t leading us into any tunnels. I was also grateful for Puku, whose gentle gait with her many legs enabled me to take a nice long nap. When I woke, we were passing a beautiful lake. “That’s Lake Pala,” remarked Jala. I admired the shimmering expanse of water, which was the same deep blue as Nixie’s mask. Wild Gukko dove for fish lurking just under the surface, and Ghekula croaked softly in the reeds.But as we left the lakeshore and returned to the thick woods, the shafts of sunlight filtering through the tree canopy suddenly disappeared. A gloomy darkness settled over the forest like a thick blanket. The birds and insects fell silent. Jala and I looked at each other. “Weird weather,” he shrugged.Puku started acting really strange. She cringed and scurried behind a rock. “Easy, girl,” I tried to reassure her. Just then a huge bolt of lightning tore through the branches overhead. A short tree right in front of Toa Tahu exploded into flames. The blinding flash was followed by an incredibly loud thunderclap that echoed through the unnaturally still forest.Jala, Puku, and I jumped about a bio in the air, but Toa Tahu just frowned at the tree. “I wonder if Gali got her powers back and did this just to torment me,” he growled, changing to his Akaku. He scanned the area around us, found nothing of interest, and changed back to his Hau. I was glad, because he invoked his power of shielding to protect us from the flying bits of burning wood that were hitting us.Oddly enough, this intimidating show of lightning and thunder was not followed by any rain. The dark cloud rolled away as suddenly as it had appeared. I was glad we weren’t going to get wet, but unfortunately, this meant the fire was likely to spread. Toa Tahu pulled his powerless swords off his back and pointed them at the blaze. “In the old days, I could have absorbed these flames into myself,” he muttered in frustration. This time, of course, nothing happened.Then there was a rustling noise in the underbrush, and Toa Lewa popped out. He hailed Toa Tahu, but the red Toa didn’t notice him. Finally, Toa Lewa grabbed his arm. “Trying to quick-burn the jungle, Fire Toa?”“Toa of Fire? Toa of nothing! I no longer command the flames, Lewa,” Toa Tahu snapped.Toa Lewa led Toa Tahu aside as a group of Le-Koronans began shoveling dirt onto the fire. I recognized Tamaru and a few others and greeted them. Puku, naturally good at digging, helped the Matoran extinguish the flames. Then I looked over at the Toa. Toa Lewa was saying, “If you search for something in my lands, then a wayfinder you must have.” Toa Tahu replied that he would be glad to have Toa Lewa’s company, and off they went, using their blades to widen the narrow thread of a path. We Matoran trailed after them, chatting about the events that had happened since we had last seen each other. It turns out that Turaga Matau was so grateful to Tamaru, Kongu, Nuparu, the other Boxor drivers, and me that he had written a special song in our honor. He had been teaching it to the Le-Koro band so they could play it for all of us at a special gathering, but then the Kal showed up.We came around a clump of brambles and stopped in our tracks at the sight of a huge pile of trees that had been ripped out of the ground and piled across the path. “What could have done this?” asked Lau.“I don’t know,” said Tamaru. “There are no marks on them.”“The Nuhvok-Kal,” said Jala, crossing his arms. “That thing is trying to slow us down.”Tamaru nodded. “Let’s see if we can help the Toa with these.” He and Lau moved to opposite ends of one of the trunks. But as they struggled in vain to lift it, I noticed that Tahu in his Pakari couldn’t even budge one of the pieces of wood. “Don’t bother,” I told them. “The Nuhvok-Kal has enhanced its gravity.”They looked at me with wide eyes. “Oh. That must be the creature that stole Toa Lewa’s symbol,” said Lau.“Yes, we’ve been following it from Ta-Wahi,” replied Jala.The Toa were having some kind of argument about the Kal. “You, of all Toa, should know that,” Toa Tahu was saying.“No,” replied Toa Lewa angrily. “I did not choose the Bohrok darktime I lived through. I do not know where the Bohrok-Kal are or what they are doing.”Apparently Toa Tahu suspected Toa Lewa of still having some sort of connection with the swarm, since he had once worn a krana. This struck me as odd at first, because they had traveled together peacefully enough before this. But then I realized the difference. Before this, they had simply been following a trail. Now they were planning some sort of trap. And that required Toa Tahu to trust Toa Lewa, because it was his jungle and he knew his way around. Finally, Toa Tahu backed off, and they began to discuss their plan.As they talked, Toa Lewa vaulted effortlessly onto the top of the stack of uprooted trees. Toa Tahu scrambled up with some difficulty after him. The fire Toa slid on his face halfway down the pile before he caught himself. He frowned and resumed his climb. They both disappeared over the barrier, their voices receding.The Le-Koronans took to the trees and used the vines to swing over the fallen trunks. Tamaru saw me staring uneasily at the obstacle that my Toa had almost fallen from, and he offered to launch me and Jala with a sapling. One at a time, we flew up to the top of the pile and grabbed on to stop ourselves. Then we were able to slide down the other side using the vines Tamaru had wrapped around our waists.The Toa had agreed on a strategy. Toa Lewa told Tamaru to return to the village and bring back as many Matoran as Turaga Matau could spare. Meanwhile, Toa Tahu disappeared into the underbrush, apparently to scout ahead for the Kal. Toa Lewa gathered the rest of us together. “Now we get to use a Bohrok-Kal for target-shoot practice,” he grinned. “Rig as many rock-slings and branch-falls as you can before Tahu returns with an angry-mad Nuhvok-Kal.”He didn’t have to say it twice. The Le-Koronans, eager to avenge their Toa against the creature whose brethren had once taken over their very minds, scrambled up into the trees to prepare their devices. Lau and Noli asked Jala and me to retrieve some big rocks for the enormous catapult they were preparing out of thick logs, powered by springy pieces of green wood. As we lugged the stones through the forest, we saw Kongu and some others overhead, rigging nets full of wood and rocks that they could release with a quick slash of the knife. Still other Le-Matoran had lifted hollow trunks into the tree canopy to use as flumes to roll heavy rocks onto the Kal.“You guys have done this before,” remarked Jala to Noli, setting his rock on the heap.“Yes, we got a lot of branch-trap practice on the Rahi,” replied the Le-Koronan flute carver.“This looks like fun, shooting at the Kal, but what good is it going to do?” I panted as I dragged a stone toward the pile.“I think the idea is to overwhelm the thing with flying objects, so it’ll be forced to use its power over and over again,” Jala replied. “It’s really pretty smart.”We assembled a large pile of stones for Lau and Noli, and then Toa Tahu came back to report where he had found the Kal. “What happens if this doesn’t work, Toa Tahu?” asked Kongu.“It has to,” he replied.“It will,” said Toa Lewa. “Now we just have to lure the Nuhvok-Kal to this spot.”Toa Tahu left to fetch the creature. I looked at Tamaru. “I wonder if he’ll use the same trick you did to get the Nuhvok-Kal’s attention,” I grinned.Tamaru laughed. “You mean this?” He did his famous mask-waving taunt. “I don’t know, but I hope your Toa is a fast ground-runner. That was fear-scary, being chased by a Bohrok.”“You have about five minutes to make-ready,” warned Toa Lewa. Everyone scrambled to collect as much ammunition as he could.Suddenly we heard a loud commotion some distance away, and Toa Lewa hissed at us all to take cover. Trees crashed to the ground, closer and closer. Then, to my utter astonishment, Toa Tahu sailed through the air, let go of a vine, and landed on his feet on the soft earth. The force of his landing, probably enhanced by being in the fringe of the Kal’s power range, drove him to his hands and knees. As Toa Lewa ran to him, he stood up with difficulty and muttered, “Don’t say a word.”“I wouldn’t dream of it.” They ran to opposite sides of the clearing as the Nuhvok-Kal approached. Over the sound of its pounding feet, it shouted, “Toa! You cannot escape from the Bohrok-Kal!”Toa Lewa gave the signal, and the mayhem began. Rocks, branches, and logs flew at the Kal from all directions. The creature pivoted, waving its hand shields at each object, but the sheer number of projectiles was clearly taxing its capacity. Chunks of wood and stone floated upward, but more replaced them as fast as it could keep track.Toa Lewa leaped at the Kal, but it saw him in time, and he was instantly slammed to the ground next to it. Toa Tahu hesitated only a split second before launching himself. Unlike Toa Lewa, he batted a dozen rocks and sticks before him with his swords first to distract it. As the Kal cleared the air of debris, Toa Tahu changed to his Pakari and hauled his fellow Toa to safety.The Le-Koronans were starting to run out of rocks, but the first projectiles we had hurled at the Kal were beginning to land again. “Come on!” yelled Jala, rushing out of the bushes to gather an armful of stones. He ducked back into the cover of the leaves and handed them to Kelu, who reloaded his slingshot and fired them again. Others, including me, joined Jala, and flying objects filled the air again.Finally the Kal seemed to have had enough. It raised its hand shields in exasperation and trotted away, pausing to pull down a few trees behind it.A loud cheer arose from the green villagers. “We did it!” yelled Kongu. Noli gave Jala a triumphant fist-clank. Tamaru cart wheeled out of his tree and slapped me on the back. We were all jubilant that the danger was past, and that we were able to help our Toa. Like a horde of Kofo-Jaga swarming over a sand Tarakava to drive it from their territory, a lot of small things were able to overcome one big, powerful thing. Turaga Vakama always goes on about the importance of unity, and sometimes I suspect he’s just interested in having fewer squabbles to arbitrate. But there’s obviously a real strength in working as one.The celebrating was cut short as the remaining rocks and logs regained their normal gravity and tumbled downward, and we ran to join the Toa in another nearby clearing. Toa Lewa was asking, “How can you ground-walk, Tahu, after you have vine-swung?”Toa Tahu leaned on his magma blades. “I leave the trees to you, brother. And if you ever tell anyone about that, I’ll—”“Our secret. Heart-swear. But next time, work on that hard-land, brother…”The two Toa burst laughing. Then Toa Tahu noticed me watching him, and he added, “This better not show up on the Wall of History, either.”“Of course not, Toa Tahu,” I grinned.Noli invited us to Le-Koro for a victory party, but Jala replied that we needed to stay with our Toa. Lau offered to fly us back to the Toa tomorrow morning on Gukko-back. But Jala shook his head. “We can’t neglect our duty to the Toa, even for a night,” he insisted.I found myself wishing my friend didn’t have such a strong sense of duty. But he was right. So I said, “It really sounds like fun, and thanks for asking. We’ll have to take you up on it when all this is over, and we have peace again.”“All right,” agreed Kongu. “We’ll have several party-feasts to catch up on!”With warm farewells from the Le-Koronans to cheer us, we set out again after the Toa, who were forging ahead toward the Fau Swamp. Apparently the Nuhvok-Kal was on its way there, too, perhaps to keep them from finding those Kakama. Once in a while we had to scale another log barrier, but Toa Lewa let us use his Miru, so it didn’t slow us much. After a couple of hours, the sunlight was fading, so we set up camp. To everyone’s delight, two Gukko landed next to our fire, and Kongu and Lau unloaded a meal of roast meat and succulent jungle fruits to share with us. As night fell, they flew back to the village, I loaded the leftovers into my pack, and Jala prepared for guard duty.Wow, I’ve written a lot tonight. And after all that excitement, too! I’m really tired. But somehow I felt like I had to get it all down. Too bad I don’t get this motivated to carve on the Wall. That’s so dreary, compared to this. A dry, boring summary of all the wonderful, amazing events that really unfolded to fill our senses, chipped tediously into the stone one boring letter at a time. This writing-on-paper thing is so much easier. Thank goodness for Nireta the navigator, who found stone tablets too cumbersome for nautical maps! She’s the one who figured out how to pound flax into pulp and dry it nice and flat. Sometime I’m going to have to tell her how much she’s changed my life. Maybe on my way to see Nixie… aww, who am I kidding? Well, anyway, I’m going to sleep. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Summer 3 : 3This morning I got up early—yes, early—so I could carve a brief summary of my visit with Turaga Vakama onto the Wall of History. Then I ran upstairs and grabbed some breakfast before I went to work. I was almost on time.After grumbling about my tardiness, Tupako explained that since we were all going to set out for Po-Koro this evening after dinner, the forges weren’t going to need any lava today. They would just be cleaning and storing their casting molds. So all we had to do was set up our equipment so that the fluid in the tanks will circulate safely until we return. We finished securing the pumps (with only one minor mistake on my part) just as the Hikaku screeched that it was lunchtime. Tupako said that after the meal we would just double-check everything. “In case you hadn’t noticed, the village is directly downstream of this facility. We can’t be too careful, you know.”Actually, I hadn’t noticed this until he pointed it out. I asked him why. Naturally I got an earful about the ill-conceived and hazardous layout of the village before he finally paused to answer my question. “I suppose things were set up this way to be more easily defended,” he speculated, “since the only two other lava sources as pure as this one are much farther away. But wild Rahi are not the biggest threat to the village, if you ask me. No one ever does, though.”It’s pretty obvious why no one ever asks him anything, if you ask me. For such a smart guy, he sure doesn’t understand his fellow Matoran very well.After lunch, I just didn’t feel like forcing myself to go back to work. I figured Tupako could do the double-checking without me. I decided to go interview Toa Tahu instead.But first I had to find him. As I tiptoed past Turaga Vakama’s doorway, I saw Jala inside. Jala usually has some idea where Toa Tahu is, so I waited for him to come out. “Oh, hello, Takua,” he said, surprised. “Why aren’t you at the lava farm?” When I explained what I wanted to do, he frowned. “Well, I really shouldn’t be helping you shirk your work, but... last I saw Toa Tahu, he was heading for the Tren Krom Break to do some surfing.”I decided not to take Puku. The terrain on the way up to the Tren Krom Break is extremely rugged, so she doesn’t go much faster than I can alone anyway. And she finds the hot, loud, splashy lava falls to be quite frightening, since she’s really an underground creature. (The rugged terrain and dramatic falls are why Toa Tahu likes it, of course.) So I started up the mountain on foot, with my board on my back. It took me most of the afternoon to get there, because it’s such a hard climb, but I figured I would get down much more quickly because I could surf.I heard Toa Tahu before I saw him, shouting joyfully and spraying arcs of brilliant magma drops against the ominous clouds that usually cloak the top of the volcano. As I came around a boulder, he was just landing from some sort of airborne maneuver. He saw me and rode his magma blades onto the bank.“Ho, Takua!” he greeted me cheerfully. He listened to my request. “Sure, I’d be happy to answer some questions. Fire away!”I asked him about his proudest moment, and he replied without hesitation. “Oh, no doubt about it, that would be the first time I surfed the very heart of the Mangai,” he beamed. “I’d been wanting to try it ever since I first set eyes on that fiery crater, but I wasn’t sure I’d survive. In fact, after we defeated Makuta, I was about to make an attempt, but Gali stopped me. I had already thrown in my board, and we stood on the edge and watched it melt into the magma.”My eyes widened. “Good thing she stopped you!”“Yeah, she’s pretty smart sometimes. But don’t tell her I said that,” he snorted. “It’ll go to her head, and she’ll become even more arrogant.”“So later you went back and did it?”“Oh, it was magnificent! After we became Nuva, I realized my pure-protodermis, heat-resistant tools would fare much better than the stone boards I had been using. So I went up there and gave it a try. It was the most exhilarating experience of my entire life. Say, you want to watch me do it again, right now?”“Sure!” I cried eagerly. But then I realized this might make me late for dinner, and then it would be obvious I had been ditching my work. And everyone would be waiting for me to get back so we could begin the journey. “But I can’t stay away too long.”He looked at me sideways. “Let me guess. You’re skipping some kind of normal work to be here?” I nodded sheepishly, and he smiled. “Well, good for you. Anyone can do those ordinary jobs. You, however, are uniquely gifted to tell our stories. You’re lucky, finding a useful task to do in peacetime. I almost wish we had some enemies to fight! But don’t worry about being late. We have my Kakama.” So off we went. The power of the mask of speed seemed to increase my coordination as well as my velocity, so to my surprise, I didn’t have any trouble cruising over the rough, rocky ground.We got to the top of the Mangaia and decelerated. The red Toa strode to the edge of the crater. I followed cautiously and looked inside. I was immediately overwhelmed by the incredible intensity of the heat and fumes. A vast expanse of boiling lava lay before us, the opposite side of the basin barely visible through the plumes of dark smoke rising from its turbulent surface. Toa Tahu glanced back at me as he slid his magma blades into his feet. “I just love this,” he grinned. Then he leaped off the bank, turning a forward flip before he landed on the glowing surface, splattering lava up to where I was standing. I blocked my mask with my arm, wincing as the tiny droplets burned into my armor.When I looked down again, he was zooming across the huge lake of fire, zigzagging between geysers and leaving a wake of serpentine ripples that were quickly swallowed up again by the lava. He pivoted to wave at me, and I was afraid he would run into something, but he spun back around in time to leap over a magma bubble. He receded into the smoky distance, finally stopping against the jagged basalt on the other side. I could see the blur as he raced around the crater using his Kakama, and in a few seconds he was standing next to me, panting. “Whew! It’s hot down there.”As usual, Toa Tahu’s surfing was technically excellent and incredibly beautiful to watch. But what amazed me even more was the fact that a living being could withstand such an inferno. There were heat waves rising off his body. Out of stupid curiosity, I reached out and touched his arm. I immediately jerked my hand back and clutched my scorched fingers. The Toa of Fire rolled his eyes. “I guess I’d better get you somewhere cooler before we go on to your second question, eh?”We raced halfway down the mountain and sat on a wide ledge overlooking the cave that houses the village. The sun smoldered low and red in the late afternoon sky. I asked my next question, about the time he was most afraid.He frowned. “I suppose that would be the time Gali almost died from a wound inflicted by Lehvak acid,” he said slowly. I leaned forward expectantly, and he explained. “It happened in Ko-Wahi. Kopeke came and summoned me to help, and I found Gali lying in the snow with Kopaka sitting next to her. He had frozen a patch onto her neck to stop the fluid loss, and he asked me to make a permanent repair with my fire power. So I did. I was really worried I would slip and injure her even more, but by some miracle it worked.” He went on to describe how her heart had stopped, but Kopaka used the signal from a seismic recorder to start it back up. Still, she was too weak for her heart to beat on its own. Her two rescuers noticed that in her delirium she was singing a song about healing waters. So together they used the healing properties of water on her, and she recovered completely.“Amazing,” I nodded. “It would have been really terrible if we had lost Toa Gali.”“Absolutely,” he agreed. “We could never have imprisoned the Bahrag without all six elemental powers. Or defeated the Bohrok-Kal. At least, not the way we did.”His curt reply made me think back to our discussion near the end of the Kal hunt, when he had told me a Toa couldn’t afford to let his emotions about his fellow warriors interfere with their teamwork. It was a little sad to me, because he was so quick to dismiss any affection for Toa Gali. I pictured the scene in my mind. Toa Tahu and Toa Kopaka are so opposite in every way, except for their desire to protect their lovely comrade—and their pride. “Was it hard to work with Toa Kopaka under so much pressure?” I asked.Toa Tahu rolled his eyes. “If Toa Gali had died, I would probably have killed him next, for letting her get injured. So, yes, it was pretty stressful. But fortunately, after a few tense words, we were able to focus on the task at hand and get the job done.”“I can see why that was scary,” I smiled. “But I was expecting you to say that using the Vahi was the most frightening thing in your life.”“I was definitely nervous. And it certainly was a challenge to control. But I figured Vakama wouldn’t have given it to me unless he thought I could handle it.” The outlines of the Great Mask of Time emerged over his Hau Nuva. I stared at it in awe at the ancient, powerful artifact as he described how it felt to slow time. He had poured every bit of his energy into the mask, forgetting everything else around him. It tingled on his face, blurred his vision, and filled his head with a loud hum. Then he leaned toward me and continued in a more confidential tone as he let the Vahi vanish again. “You know, it’s easy for me to burn stuff. I look forward to every chance I have to unleash incendiary chaos. But to do precision work is hard. It requires so much self-control. To channel the raging flame that pervades my body and soul into a focused beam that heals instead of destroys really goes against my nature. So that’s why it was more frightening to use my powers on Gali’s neck.”I looked at him thoughtfully. “Maybe Turaga Vakama knows that about you, and that’s why he was reluctant to let you have the Vahi until it was really our last hope. He was afraid you would lose control.”He gave a short laugh. “Vakama does his best to understand me, but he can never really know what goes on in the heart of a fire Toa. As a Turaga, his life is all about order and restraint.”“I’m with you on that one,” I groaned. “And speaking of order... and of time... I’d better be getting back. Thanks so much for talking with me.”Toa Tahu chuckled and slapped my back. “You’re quite welcome. It was my pleasure.” He put his long boards on his feet, and I picked up my smaller one, and together we surfed our way back to the village just in time for me to slip into the dining hall crowd.I had a tense moment when I bumped into Tupako on my way to the table. But as he started to rail about me skipping work, Jala interrupted him. “It’s all right, Tupako. I sent him on an assignment.” He winked at me. “Military reporting.”Once again, Jala proves to be the ultimate friend. I was able to enjoy my dinner and help pack for the trip. On a request from Taipu, who was here delivering a message from his Turaga, we all brought our lavaboards, although we have no idea why. We made good time and set up a quick camp. At dawn we’ll leave again to finish the journey to Po-Koro.I’m really flattered Toa Tahu had so much to say to me. But now that I’ve written it down, it’s time to get some rest. Tomorrow is going to be a big day. Who knows, by the end of it I might just be Taakhua the Chronicler, best friend of Jallha the Captain of the Guard!Summer 3 : 4Well, I can’t pretend not to be disappointed with the Naming Day ceremony itself. But the rest of today was absolutely splendid.As soon as we got to Po-Koro and set up our tents, the Turaga herded us into the koli stadium for the ceremony. Their new facility is amazing. Its pale stone gleams in the sunlight, as yet unweathered by the gritty wind of this region but still somehow looking as if it has already stood solidly for centuries. I recognized some of Hafu’s signature touches in the detailed carvings that adorn the entryway as I passed through.The Turaga got right to business. “Brave Matoran,” began Turaga Nokama. “You have weathered a time of challenges with courage, spirit and unity. We wish especially to recognize those who stood against the Bohrok in the final battle against the swarms. In the face of darkness, you were a beacon of light for us all.”Turaga Vakama raised his staff. “The defenders of Ga-Koro shall receive a special honor. Even as the Toa became the Toa Nuva, so too will these heroes have new names when their tale is carved in the chronicles.”Jala was the first to be called. “Captain of the Ta-Koro Guard,” Turaga Vakama declared with pride. “Your valor and dedication to duty are an example to all. When your name is inscribed upon the Wall of History, you shall be known as Jaller.”As the crowd cheered, Huki of Po-Koro and Maku of Ga-Koro too were granted new names. For their deeds at Ga-Koro, they will be known henceforth as Hewkii and Macku.At last, Turaga Vakama called one final name. “Chronicler Takua, inscribe these names upon the Wall of History, as is your duty,” he said sternly. “And try to spell them correctly.”So there you have it. Of course Jaller, Hewkii, and Macku deserve the honor. Still, I feel a little twinge of envy. After all, I was foolhardy enough to get Jaller to fling me in front of the enemy. Doesn’t that count as bravery? I’m guessing I didn’t get a new name because Turaga Vakama doesn’t want other Matoran to hold me up as a model citizen. If everyone acted like me, no work would ever get done. Curse that Tupako, for planting the silly idea in my head that I might get a new name! If he hadn’t mentioned it, it probably wouldn’t even have occurred to me. I glanced across the crowd, and he was smirking at me.Oh, and ‘koli’ is now ‘kolhii,’ since the Po-Koronans have reinvented it. Talk about your pointless extra carving work. The long-rumored kolhii tournament was finally announced, too. The championship match will take place in four weeks. I didn’t pay much attention as Turaga Onewa explained the details, since I won’t be on the team anyway. My mind was still reeling from my lack of new name.I felt a little better when Nixie came up to me afterwards and whispered, “I can’t believe you didn’t get a new name, Takua! What you did was just as brave.” Of course, she could whisper the parts list of her telescope to me, and it would make me feel good.Well, after that bit of misery was over, we found out why Taipu had asked us to bring our boards along. The Po- and Onu-Koronans have invented a new sport they call ‘sandboarding.’ They led us to a rocky cliff, and we all climbed to the top. On the back side was a sandy slope. We spent all afternoon riding our boards down it, over and over again. For those who didn’t have boards, the Ga-Koronans had crafted some extras of bamboo and brought them along.Sandboarding isn’t as exciting as lava surfing, and it tends to put a lot of wear and tear on your board. (Instead of having to chip off the slag buildup, you have the opposite problem—the surface of your board is literally sanded off.) But the great thing about it is that everyone on the whole island can enjoy it. I don’t think we’ll ever get the water or ice villagers to share our enthusiasm for riding the magma waves!The earth and stone villagers had been practicing, so of course they were proficient already. But it took time for the rest of us to adapt to the new element. The Ko-Koronans figured it out the fastest because they’re used to sledding down a steep slope, although the sand isn’t nearly as slick as their snow. The Ga-Koronans had to become accustomed to the incline as well as the gritty, solid texture of the sand, but they have a natural balance that we clumsier males seem to lack. We Ta-Koronans picked it up pretty quickly simply because we spend more time on boards than anyone else. The Le-Koronans, who don’t surf at all, were the most fun to watch as they learned. They spent more time rolling down the hill than upright.The Toa got into it, too. Toa Pohatu (skiing on his huge feet) and Toa Onua (riding his quake breakers) were showing off and jumping over each other, their deep voices shouting playful challenges at each other. Toa Tahu and Toa Gali (riding their connected tools) each exhibited a mastery of the sport right away, naturally on opposite sides of the slope. (I did catch Toa Tahu watching her once, when he didn’t think anyone was looking. He saw me and quickly headed down the hill.) Toa Lewa wasn’t used to so much friction, and at first he fared little better than his villagers. Then Toa Tahu showed him how to do it, and he figured it out. But eventually he settled on his own method, which was to crouch on his joined katanas, hovering just above the sand using his Miru, and push himself along with his hands. Whenever he passed too close to a Matoran, the wind would blow the hapless surfer sideways into the sand. Toa Kopaka preferred to freeze a thin strip of ice over the sand ahead of himself. This way, he was still skating on his own element.Toa Pohatu asked twenty of his villagers to lie down next to each other, and then he raced to the top of the slope. He skiied rapidly toward them, and then, just before he reached the first one, he sailed into the air over their trusting heads, his immense heavy feet landing mere bios past the last one. The mountain shook with the impact. He spun around, spraying a rooster tail of sand behind him. “Top that if you can, Onua!” he taunted.Toa Onua shook his head. “I can’t top that, Pohatu. But I can do better.” He arranged a score of his own people in the same configuration and took his place at the summit. But as he zoomed toward them, he sank into the ground, the sand caving in to fill the hole he had just disappeared into. He popped up just below the last Matoran and shook off the dust. Toa Pohatu laughed so hard it echoed off the cliffs a kio away.My friends, of course, had a blast. Jaller, with his incredible athletic ability, caught on right away. Raku and Lito soon were surfing like the natives, too. Nixie cautiously made it down on a board of bamboo, jumping off whenever it started to go too fast for her taste.It turns out that Kai is a really awesome surfer, probably the best in Ga-Koro. She kept zigzagging around Lito and teasing him about being so slow. Finally he reached out as she passed by and grabbed her leg. She flipped over, dragging him down the hill with her. They tumbled to a stop in the sand, all tangled up together, their boards lying a few bios down the slope.Lito rolled over and spit out some sand. Then he leaned over Kai, who was still giggling. He cleared his throat and asked, “Kai, will you be my girlfriend?”Kai sat up straight and glared at him. “You’ve got a lot of nerve,” she snapped, “waiting so long to ask me!” Then she tackled him and shoved his face into the sand. He came back up, sputtering, and lunged at her. They lost their balance and rolled down the slope together. Then Lito crawled onto his board and stood up, and Kai jumped onto the back of it, and they rode, swerving crazily, all the way to the bottom together.I was standing at the top, watching them and wishing I had the nerve to be that bold with Nixie, when she came up behind me and asked shyly, “Can I ride on the back of your board?”“Sure!” I exclaimed. She stepped on and lightly placed her hand on my shoulder to steady herself. I pushed off, and we wove down the slope. I could feel her shifting her weight to help me steer. And at the bottom, even after she got off again, my shoulder still tingled from the soft touch of her fingers.Taipu jumped onto the back of Mokali’s board, and Lau onto Kongu’s, and soon everyone was doubling up. Another new sport was created: tandem sandboard racing. The back rider on each board tries to knock the others off their boards while the front rider steers for the finish line. In the impromptu tournament that followed, Jaller and Hahli made it to the quarter-finals by shoving Nixie and me into a dune. But they were no match for Hewkii and Macku, the most ruthless pair on the slope, who left a dozen teams sprawling in their wake.As we sat around the fires this evening, life felt simple and pleasant. With peace and light reigning on the island once more, surrounded by friends, exhausted from joyful sport, I felt very lucky. The fact that I wasn’t recognized for my crazy, last-second action in Ga-Koro during the Pahrak attack didn’t really matter. I didn’t do it to be a hero, anyway, so why should I feel slighted?Jaller joked with me that at least I wouldn’t have to do extra work to carve my own name. Then he glanced at Puku and grinned mischievously. “Say, since you’re the one doing all the carving, you could...”“...give Puku a new name?” I burst out laughing. But now that I think about it, why not? So I’m going to add this: “From this day forward, whenever her deeds are written on the great Wall of History, the faithful Ussal crab Puku shall be known by the name of Pewku.” That ought to be pompous enough for Turaga Vakama.Tomorrow I’m going to stay behind and rebuild her. I’ve already gotten permission. And while I’m at it, since Pewku will be stronger and faster, I’ll stick around and talk to Turaga Onewa and Toa Pohatu. Then I can race back to my boring job. I’m sure Tupako will be gloating over my unchanged name. Oh, well, at least there’s always a good party after a kolhii tournament. It’s something to look forward to.Summer 3 : 5Everyone left for their village this morning except for the Po-Koronans, obviously, and me and my crab, the newly renamed Pewku. (It feels so odd to write her name that way! I guess Jaller and the others have to think before they sign their own names now. Sigh.) I reported to Turaga Onewa, and he took us down to the cave at the Kini-Nui. He opened the door to the secret parts chamber, and I breathed in the cool, musty air as my eyes adjusted to the dim light inside. Tamaru gave me the sleep-inducing herbs yesterday, and I fed them to Pewku with a big centipede wrapped around them. She crunched eagerly into the bug and gulped it all down. Within a few minutes her legs sagged and she dropped to the floor.I remembered how Turaga Vakama had carefully applied force in just the right direction on each part to pull our limbs apart with maximum efficiency and minimum pain. It’s really a brilliant design, because we can’t be accidentally dismembered by random forces. The deconstruction must be very deliberate. So I studied the first joint and described to Turaga Onewa how I planned to disconnect it. He nodded his approval, and I popped off one of Pewku’s legs. After a few minutes I had the leg dismantled, rebuilt, and reattached. Turaga Onewa complimented my design. “Nice work, Takua. She’ll be quite powerful, I think.” By the time I repeated the operation on her other legs, the herbs were beginning to wear off. She swiped at me weakly with her new limbs as I split her back apart. Once I assembled the middle section, the Turaga helped me push her back together with one loud, final snap. Then we backed up and let her stagger to her feet.My beloved crab lurched unsteadily a few times before getting used to her new configuration, but in minutes she was bounding all over the room. I escorted her back out into the morning sunlight while Turaga Onewa locked up the storeroom. I let her run a few laps around the temple before I called her. Breathless, she skittered up to me, and I climbed onto her new, broad back. There was plenty of room for Turaga Onewa, too. He accepted the offer with a grin. “It’s been a long time since I’ve ridden a Rahi,” he chuckled as we made our way back to the stone village. I was sure there was a good story behind this remark, but in typical Turaga style, he kept it to himself.He did, however, agree to an interview. He sat down on a bench behind a work table in his hut and motioned for me to take a seat across from him. When I asked about his proudest moment, he smiled broadly. “That would have to be the way Hafu confronted the Tahnok, and then Hewkii and Toa Pohatu rescued him.”I smiled back and nodded. Of course I had heard the tale before, like everyone else on the island. But I was hopeful that, in this more intimate setting, Turaga Onewa would provide some extra insight, and I turned out to be right. The elder of the stone village described the entire scene in such great detail that I could almost sense the heat of the flames licking the sculptor’s armor and smell the stench of burning metal and sand. I felt the earth shudder as the beautifully crafted statues toppled over and cracked asunder. I sighed with relief when Toa Pohatu leaped into the fray and snatched Hafu from the path of the marauding machines. And even though I knew Hewkii’s small rock would hit its mark, tipping the large one to launch Toa Pohatu and Hafu into the air, Turaga Onewa told it so compellingly that I held my breath until they had landed safely on the bluff.The Turaga of Stone leaned back and clasped his hands behind his head. “Did you know Hewkii and Hafu used to despise each other?” When I shook my head in surprise, he explained. “The kolhii players and the stone carvers didn’t used to get along at all. They competed constantly for resources, for glory, for everything. It was getting really tense around the time Toa Pohatu showed up. It was almost as if I had two separate, hostile villages under my direction.”“I take it Hewkii was the leader of the kolhii players, and Hafu of the carvers?”“Exactly. And they were both working for me. I tried to keep their duties separate, because if they so much as passed each other in the square, you could be sure one would manage to ‘accidentally’ jostle the other, and taunts from their respective groups would follow.”I rolled my eyes. Matoran can be rather bull-headed sometimes, particularly those from the stone region. Turaga Onewa seemed to be waiting for me to ask the obvious question, so I did. “How did they become friends?”“Well, amusingly enough, it was because of a Ga-Matoran. Do you know Lili?”I nodded. “She’s a friend of Macku’s, isn’t she?”“Yes. Well, Hafu saw her sitting in the stands with Macku at a kolhii match, and he suddenly took a keen interest in the sport. To avoid offending the girls, Hewkii and Hafu pretended to get along that day. Hafu asked Hewkii for a kolhii lesson, and Hewkii noticed he had quite a talent for the game. So for the sake of the team, he swallowed his pride and trained his rival. They ended up forging a friendship after all.”“They do make a really good kolhii team,” I smiled. “Jaller and I played them at the Kini-Nui the other day, and they kicked our sorry rear ends.”Turaga Onewa laughed. “I don’t doubt that they did. After all, Hewkii is the one who invented the sport. And it’s amazing how much one can accomplish when inspired by an attractive female.”I wondered if the wizened, hunched-over village elder sitting across from me had ever fancied a girl himself. I was pretty sure he would duck the question, so I asked a different one. “Did Hafu teach Hewkii to carve in return?”“Actually, yes. The results weren’t quite as spectacular as Hafu’s mastery of kolhii, but Hewkii does have some natural skill,” he replied. “Did you notice the large stone flower Hewkii gave to Macku at the Naming Day ceremony?”“I did. It was really nice.” Seeing Hewkii’s gift left me feeling as if I should be making a present for Nixie. If only I were good at something besides wandering and shirking work! I moved on to my final question. “So, Turaga Onewa, what was the moment when you were most afraid?”The smile on the Turaga’s mask was replaced by a distant expression. “That would probably be when half the village was dying of infection.”“That was more frightening than all the enemies you’ve faced and battles you’ve fought?” I asked incredulously.“Yes, it was, and I’ll tell you why. No one could figure out the problem, and my people were losing their grip, babbling and drooling and delirious from the fever. They were slipping away toward madness and death, and I felt completely helpless to do anything for them. It was much worse than an enemy you can confront directly. At least when you face a vicious creature twice your size, you have the satisfaction of knowing you’ll win or lose, live or die, right there on the spot.”“I see.”“And you were the one to get us out of that mess, as I recall,” he added.I shrugged. “Just in the right place at the right time.”Turaga Onewa leaned forward and patted my arm. “And with eyes and mind open to see the clues.”All this praise was making me uncomfortable, particularly since I’m about the most clueless Matoran I know, so I decided it was time to conclude the interview. I thanked him for talking with me and asked him where I might find Toa Pohatu. “He’s around here somewhere. Just listen for the sound of falling rocks,” he suggested.After few minutes of wandering in the desert, I spotted Toa Pohatu standing on a high cliff, waving his arms at a rock formation. The massive stone outcrop immediately collapsed into dust with a deafening rumble. Then he summoned his power of stone to bring the particles back together. It was absolutely amazing to see the rock rise back up as if it had been standing there undisturbed for eons.I scrambled up a path of loose rubble toward him, with Pewku close behind. When I slipped and lost my footing, I fell backwards onto her shell. She snorted at my clumsiness and carried me to the top with no apparent effort. Clinging to her carapace, I grinned as I imagined how easy it was going to be to cross the island now.We crested the ridge just in time to see a vanishing reddish-orange blur. Unfortunately, Toa Pohatu seemed to have decided to practice using his Kakama Nuva just then, and we had barely missed him. I sighed and slid off Pewku, scanning the horizon to see where he would reappear. Then I suddenly heard a sound behind me. Pewku and I both jumped about a bio in the air.“Peek-a-boo,” grinned the Toa of Stone.“Hello, Toa Pohatu,” I groaned.He slapped my shoulder with his massive hand, and I just about fell over. “How’s it going, storyteller?”“Great,” I smiled. “Say, if you’ve got a minute, would you mind if I interviewed you?”“No problem.” He walked over to a boulder and gave it a kick, sending stone shards flying out of the center to form a rough armchair. He gestured for me to sit down. Then he made a second, larger chair for himself. “What does Pewku like to sit on?”“Oh, she’s fine on the ground,” I shrugged. I got right to it and asked him about his proudest moment.The brown Toa leaned back and crossed his powerful legs. “Ah, what a nice question that one is. Encouraging me to brag about myself. Well, I guess that would be the night I knocked a meteor out of the sky.”“A meteor?” I asked, astonished.“Yep. It was during the time of the infected Rahi. Gali came and warned me about it after her astrologer had spotted it with her telescope.”So Nixie was part of this heroic act, too! I couldn’t wait to ask her about it. But in the meantime, Toa Pohatu was continuing his story. “We could see it approaching, a fireball burning brighter and brighter. It looked like it was headed right for Mata Nui. Gali insisted I could kick a rock hard enough to deflect it. I had my doubts, to be sure, but of course I had to try.”“And you did it?”“Eventually. It took a lot of attempts. I used my Pakari to give myself some extra strength, and Gali used hers to fetch me a bunch of stones. First I kicked some smaller ones at it, as a range-finding exercise. When I had figured out the proper trajectory and knocked a few bits off it, I sent some larger ones. Finally I hit it dead on with a really big one. The explosion was spectacular.”My eyes grew wide. “I imagine so!”“Gali had to use her water power to subdue the tsunami that started when the biggest part fell into the ocean. And then I pretty much just fell face-forward onto the sand with exhaustion,” he chuckled. “Gali moved me while I was asleep, so the rising tide wouldn’t drown me. When I woke up, she showed me a chunk of the meteor she had retrieved from the sea. I still have it in my hut. It’s unnaturally dense, like the stone in Mangaia.”I shivered at the thought of the being that could compress stone. “I see.”“I don’t know why he sent it, honestly,” Toa Pohatu said darkly. “There wouldn’t have been anyone left on the island to worship him, if it hadn’t gone off course.”It did seem like a reckless move, even for the Master of Shadows, but I didn’t really want to think about him. “You mean if you hadn’t knocked it off course,” I corrected the Toa.“I had lots of help,” he shrugged. “Gali and Nixie were just as important as me in that story. Say, you’re a friend of Nixie’s, aren’t you? You should ask her about it.”“I will,” I replied with an embarrassed smile. “So, what was your most terrifying moment?”“Wow. There have been so many!” he exclaimed. “I guess I’ll just pick one.”I looked at him in surprise. It was hard to imagine the jovial Toa of Stone being afraid of anything. But I guess a hero doesn’t let on that he’s worried, even when on the inside he’s shaking like a leaf, because it would demoralize us little guys.“Probably the most scared I’ve ever been was the day we took on the Nui-Jaga in its nest in the quarry,” he remarked. “Being blinded was a truly unnerving sensation. My entire village was in mortal danger, and I felt so utterly useless.”I vividly remember the day I first saw Toa Pohatu. I had used the key I stole from the Comet salesman, and I was standing in the nest looking at all the infected balls when the huge arachnid scuttled into the chamber and rattled its tail at me. I turned to run, but then I heard a commotion in the doorway. A huge brown being materialized there, and I just about passed out from fear until I figured out it must be a Toa. Then I was filled with relief, because I knew he would save me. Evidently he wasn’t so sure about that himself, especially when the creature hit him in the face with its blinding venom.“But you defeated it anyway,” I reminded him.“With the help of a certain little multicolored traveler.” He rubbed his orange eyes as if they still burned at the memory. “‘A little to the left,’ you said. ‘Now up just a tad.’ Your voice was trembling, so I knew you were afraid, too. It was all I could do to pretend I wasn’t.”We laughed together at our moment of terror so long ago. He reminded me how bad it smelled in that dank cavern, and I remembered the nausea I had felt. I told him the dust cloud was really impressive when the nest came down. “I know,” he nodded. “I was just starting to see again at that point, and then I got my eyes full of grit!”We spent a few more minutes reminiscing before he whisked Pewku and me back to the village with his Great Mask of Speed. I climbed onto my newly beefed-up crab for the trip home, happy with the results of the interviews so far. It was interesting to me that in response to the pride question, both Toa had cited their own triumphs, whereas the Turaga had bragged about the heroism of their villagers. I suppose when you’re too old and hunched over to beat up on enemies yourself, you take pride in the next generation you helped to guide and train. All of them had mentioned an incident when they felt powerless as the moment of fear.I got in late, even though Pewku’s speed is really impressive now. Oh, and on the way home, I thought of something I can make for Nixie! I’m not going to even write it down until I make sure it works first, though, or else I’ll feel like a moron whenever I read my own journal.I ate a snack in my room, since the dining room was already closed. Pewku went right to sleep after finishing hers. Well, I guess I should do the same, so I can be rested for yet another exciting day in the lava fields tomorrow. I’m really looking forward to listening to Tupako gloat about how I still have my old name. Oh, well. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Lewa, like the other Toa I've talked to, had a pretty odd dream recently. He told me all about it -- and a few other things, too. Warning: Do not take this as an excuse to post Lewa's story. *glances over shoulder* The admins don't mess around.Lewa JestingLewa: I dreamed I was flying with some Nui-Rama. We were dogfighting each other, it was really fun. Then they motioned for me to follow them to their hive. So I did, but they jumped me and slapped an infected Miru Nuva on me.GaliGee: Yikes! I bet that brought back a few memories.Lewa: Definitely. And just like in real life, Onua showed up in a big cloud of dust. But he was jumped by some Nuhvok and kranaed. I said, "So now that we're minions of evil, let's go have some fun!" Onua didn't want to at first, but I talked him into it. I mean, it was obviously just a dream. Since when do Nuhvok dance the Can-Can in real life?GaliGee: Onua said they were tap-dancing.Lewa: They did a little of that, too. Anyway, he kept asking me, "Are you sure it's OK?" And I said, "Of course. Let's go pester Kopaka."GaliGee: What have you got against Kopaka?Lewa: Have you ever read any of the comics? He's always picking on me. It's one sarcastic comment after another from that guy. I mean, I would never hurt him in real life, but hey, it was a dream! The perfect opportunity to get even.GaliGee: So you went to Ko-Wahi?Lewa: Yes, we flew there. It was really a test of my flying skills, Onua is SO heavy. Good thing he doesn't get airsick any more.GaliGee: Uh, yeah. From Onua's dream, it sounds like you put Kopaka through some rough treatment.Lewa: We did. Onua kept asking, "What if it really hurts him?"GaliGee: What does Onua have against Kopaka?Lewa: Nothing. He was just sticking up for me. But it was weird. Kopaka wouldn't fight back.GaliGee: Probably because he's lost his ice powers.Lewa: Really?GaliGee: Really. You should go online more often, Lewa.Lewa [laughs]: Everyone tells me that! Well, I would, but I can't stand dial-up, it's just so slow. And Nuju's computer has a high-speed connection, but he won't let me use his computer any more, after what happened last time.GaliGee: What happened last time?Lewa: Well, it was last year, when we had just started fighting the Bohrok. After I played around on the Internet for a while, I downloaded the Desktop Bohrok and left it running. Nuju took one look at the Lehvak burning acid holes in his monitor, and he panicked. He thought the Bohrok had hacked the system. By the time Matoro told him it was actually something from bionicle.com, he had rebooted from a floppy, reformatted the entire hard drive, and reinstalled Windows and all the applications. So I'm not welcome up there any more.GaliGee: I see. Well, getting back to your dream, Kopaka's symbol was stolen in comic #9, and he lost his elemental powers. He's falling off a broken bridge right now, with no way to slow his fall.Lewa: That's terrible! Well, that would explain my dream, then. If I weren't afraid of getting fired, I would just go save him right now. I mean, if I can carry Onua while I'm flying, Kopaka would be easy.GaliGee: It's nice that you really care about Kopaka, after all. But -- you'd get fired?Lewa: Probably. I'm already kind of on shaky ground with LEGO. Did I ever tell you how I got kranaed?GaliGee: Why, no. I assumed you were surrounded by your kranaed Turaga and villagers, along with some Lehvak, and they overwhelmed you with their numbers.Lewa: The REAL reason is this. I was hanging out in the hallway at the LEGO headquarters, you know, between comics, and I overheard this big fat guy in a really expensive suit arguing with another guy. "Kids don't want their robots living in huts and wearing primitive masks! They want outer space! Let's scrap these ugly drum-beating Toaragas and push that high-tech Galidor stuff."GaliGee: Boy, was he wrong!Lewa: Yeah, the marketing data is hard to argue with. But when this happened, Bionicle wasn't that popular yet. So I ducked into the office of the Bionicle designers. They said hi to me, but they were too busy to notice what I was doing. I built a Fikou and slipped it into that executive's chair.GaliGee: How funny!Lewa: After all the screaming had died down, he demanded to know who had done it. And somebody had seen me, I didn't switch to my Huna fast enough. So then he stormed into the Story Team meeting. He grabbed Greg Farshtey by the collar, lifted him about a foot out of his chair, and yelled, "Make something REALLY BAD to happen to that green guy, or you're through!"GaliGee: I had no idea it was so political.Lewa: Yeah, everything is. So, even though they were originally going to make Tahu the big Toa-getting-kranaed story, they made it happen to me instead.GaliGee: But Tahu DID get kranaed.Lewa: Yeah, for about thirty seconds. And LEGO never gave the details. But I had to wear that hideous rubber brain for two months! And hear everybody talk about how immature and reckless I am. Again.GaliGee: That's too bad. So, back to your dream… was there any more?Lewa: Oh, yes. I dreamed I was flying, and I swooped down really fast behind Gali and picked her up with my legs. I was going to play a little trick on her.GaliGee: Gali mentioned a dream with a flying adventure. What sort of trick?Lewa: I was planning to fly up high with her. I knew she would probably thrash and kick until I got some altitude, and then she would be too scared of falling to resist.GaliGee: To resist what?Lewa: Being carried away. So I was going to fly around a little until she relaxed a bit. And then I would let go of her and let her drop, so she would have to grab onto me.GaliGee: You sly dog.Lewa: Why, thank you. It was a great plan. But it didn't turn out that way, because when she started to look down at Mata Nui, she got all sentimental. We flew over Le-Wahi, where all the reforestation work was going on, and Po-Koro, where the carvers were busy building new gates, and Ga-Koro, where workers were laying out the new causeway. I looked at her, and her gold eyes were full of tears. I just didn't have the heart to be mean to her. So I took her back home and set her down. I couldn't even think what to say to her, so I just took off. I called up a big air current really quickly so I wouldn't have to make conversation!GaliGee: Aww. That was sweet of you, Lewa. When she told me about her dream, she said she was surprised by how serious and kind you were.Lewa: Cool! Now that she trusts me, I can try that trick in real life. And this time I WILL drop her!GaliGee: Lewa! You're incorrigible.Lewa: Muah hah hah hah.GaliGee: I can see transforming into a Toa Nuva hasn't changed you TOO much.Lewa: Nope. Same old me inside. But now I can make LOTS more trouble.GaliGee: Any more dream after that?Lewa: Yep. It seems Tahu had been watching our flight, and he was hopping mad. I went home the long way, up around the Po-Wahi coast, over Onu-Wahi, and past Mount Ihu. He was waiting for me. He said, "What took you so long, punk?" I hate it when he calls me "punk."GaliGee: But Onua calls you that.Lewa: That's different! I don't mind when Shorty does it. But with Tahu, it always means he's fixing to pick a fight with me.GaliGee: From what Tahu told me, he DID pick a fight with you.Lewa: Yeah, he yelled at me for putting Gali in danger. And then he shot flames up at me, and made me lose control. The heat waves were keeping me up in the air, but the Miru was making me go every which way because I was tumbling and couldn't keep my feet pointed down. I got really dizzy. But Pohatu showed up and kicked a big rock at him, and I was able to right myself and glide down to the ground. Then I got out of there as fast as I could when they started playing. Pohatu was kicking rocks at Tahu, and he was batting them away with his swords. It was pretty spectacular, but I just wanted to get home.GaliGee: I think Tahu was just worried about Gali.Lewa: Yeah, right. And Jala's gonna win the Huai Snowball Sling this year, and Huki will be the new canoe-racing champion.GaliGee [laughs]: Maybe he overreacted a little.Lewa: You know, I love working for LEGO. But I wish they had made one more girl Toa. One that likes me.GaliGee: But Gali DOES like you, Lewa. Why else would she beat up on you all the time?Lewa: Well, Gali and I do have fun. But I’d like one that would show her affection in other ways besides kicking me in the ribs. Actually, FIVE more girl Toa would be good.GaliGee: LEGO will never do that, because Bionicle is mostly marketed to boys.Lewa: A DOZEN more girl Toa would be even better. Let's see… Reia, Toa of Sunshine… Flora, Toa of Flowers… Fruti, Toa of Fruit… Fluta, Toa of Music… Arbori, Toa of Trees… Say, could you write a story about that?GaliGee: Um, maybe someday, Lewa. Can we get back to your dream now?Lewa: The one where I’m surrounded by a dozen girl Toa?GaliGee: No, I don't want to hear about that one! The one you were telling me about before.Lewa: Oh, that one. Well, that was the end of it. I woke up at home in Le-Koro.GaliGee: I see. So, what do you think it all means?Lewa: It means I should stop eating so many Mukau tacos right before bedtime.GaliGee: No, I mean, did the dream have any significance for you?Lewa: Oh. You sound like Onua. Uh, yeah, even though it was just a dream, I felt kinda bad picking on Kopaka like that. I remember being possessed by evil in real life, and it's so creepy. You can justify things in your mind that you KNOW are wrong. And you want to blame it on the infected mask, or the krana, but there's something in all of us that wants to be mean.GaliGee: Well, it's good that you're aware of that. If you know yourself, you can manage it better.Lewa: Yeah. It's been coming out in all of us lately. I'm glad we Toa are taking a break from each other. The Turaga tried to arrange another meeting, but wild horses couldn't drag me to Kini-Nui at this point!GaliGee: There are horses on Mata Nui?Lewa: Yes, mustangs that roam the Po-Koronan plains.GaliGee: Oh. But running away from your differences is never a permanent solution. You are no doubt going to have to work together again.Lewa: I don't want to get back together until we really need to, though. I mean, even Onua was starting to get on my nerves. I love him like a brother, but he always wants to hang out in the gloomiest places.GaliGee: I can imagine.Lewa: That, and whenever I visit him I always hit my head on the doorway of his hut. But what's funny is, since he went Nuva and got taller, now HE hits his head on the doorway, too!GaliGee [laughs]: Oops, I shouldn't laugh. Now I'M being mean.Lewa: There's a fine line between a good joke and a mean one.GaliGee: Well, stay on the right side of that line, Lewa! I really appreciate you talking to us about your dream.Lewa: No problem. Hey, next time we're at the LEGO headquarters, why don't you come there, too? I'll take you apart and smuggle you to Mata Nui in my suitcase. Then we'll have two girl Toa!GaliGee: Lewa, I'm not a real Toa. Besides, LEGO might fire you, remember?Lewa: Oh, yeah. Darn. Well, see ya!GaliGee: Bye, Lewa. [click]Hmm. Lewa's story idea sounds like something my buddy BZP member Yotanua, Toa of Time, would write... Thanks to GregF, Torhu, and Lewa the Jester for ideas. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

In my quest to discover more about the Toa’s current state of mind, I called Tahu to ask if he, like the other Toa, has had any unusual dreams. Indeed, he has.Tahu IncensedGaliGee: Every Toa I've talked to so far has just had a really strange dream. And there are common events in all of them. Have you had any dreams lately?Tahu: Oh, definitely. I dreamed I went to Ko-Wahi to help Kopaka, since he lost his ice powers.GaliGee: That's what Kopaka and Gali dreamed, too! Tell us about it, please.Tahu: Sure. I walked up to Kopaka, and he was shoveling snow with his shield. I thought that was rather odd, and when I got closer to him, I came into range of the Akaku. I saw Gali under a huge pile of snow! I don't know what he had done to her, but we had to get her out, fast. He stepped out of my way so I could melt the snow and pull her out.GaliGee: And you warmed her up?Tahu: Well, yeah. She was really freezing, from being in that snow so long. And, well, I'm pretty warm.GaliGee: How did Kopaka react to all this?Tahu: He was the usual cold Kopaka. He refused my help. I was already wanting to set his frosty, um, self on fire for what he did to Gali, and I was trying really hard to control my temper. But when he told me to go away, after I had walked all the way to Ko-Wahi with no Kakama, I guess I lost it.GaliGee: And you burned him?Tahu: Yeah. I'm not proud of that, but I did. Then after I walked Gali back to Ga-Wahi, I came back to talk to him again.GaliGee: Wow, that's a lot of walking, to help someone you aren't even getting along with at the moment.Tahu: Well, he's an unrepentant #####, but he's still a Toa, and we have to help each other, when one of us is fool enough to get in trouble. But I still think a Toa Nuva, if he's paying attention, can single-handedly defend Mata Nui.GaliGee: What happened the second time you talked to him?Tahu: Same thing, pretty much. I came back and he was lying unconscious on a rock. I think he had just fallen or something. He told me to leave again.GaliGee: Would you ever consider apologizing to Kopaka, for what happened when you fought in comic #9? You know, just to restore the peace?Tahu. Sure. When pigs fly.GaliGee: There are pigs on Mata Nui?Tahu: There used to be lots of wild boars in the forest near Ta-Koro. After it was burned, they moved on to Le-Wahi, I think. But anyway, no apologies. Kopaka was just asking for trouble, challenging me like that.GaliGee: Hmm. Well, I hope you two can come to some understanding, because it's my hunch you will end up working together again.Tahu: I suppose so. There IS that "Six heroes, one destiny" thing. I won't apologize, but I'll forgive him if he asks. [sighs] I guess I should dream about him again, so I can go apologize for burning him in the dream, anyway. He was completely defenseless, that time.GaliGee: You can do that?Tahu: I have no idea, but it's worth a try.GaliGee: Sure. So where did you go after Ko-Wahi?Tahu: I went back home. Vakama told me Jala's Guard had sighted what appeared to be a new enemy. Some kind of silver Bohrok. And Onua had shown up, and was waiting for me in a cave, so that we could attack it together. So I hopped on my lava board and went surfing down the Mangai to investigate.GaliGee: Now, this is starting to sound like Onua's dream.Tahu: I don't know why Onua was waiting for me, since he could have taken this thing out on his own. But I got to the cave, and he was resting, so I threw him a rock to surf on, and off we went. We got closer, and Onua wanted to dig under it and surprise it. What a wimp. We don't need stealth anymore, with all the power we have!GaliGee: I suppose Onua was just being cautious, since we don't know much about the new enemies yet.Tahu: Whatever. So I rounded the corner, and there was Gali, hitting me with a blast of water like a fire hose. Knocked me off my board, into the lava. I was pretty furious about that!GaliGee: Now this is tying into Gali's dream.Tahu: Oh, OK. I yelled at her. I guess got a little too mad. But there she was, leaving the safety of her Wahi after I had gone to all that trouble to save her and get her home. And hitting me with the water, that just added insult to injury. So then I saw a brilliant flash, and I woke up on a rock next to the magma flow, alone.GaliGee: That was a Bohrok-Kal blasting you, in Gali's and Onua's dreams. Gali said she hit the Kal with her water jet, and got you, too, by accident. Then the Kal came back and hit you with some kind of strange energy. Remember, Greg Farshtey said that you would lose to a Nuhvok-Kal in comic #11?Tahu: Oh, yeah. Oh, no! I'd better go apologize to Gali. I'll try to dream about her again tonight, too.GaliGee: You're going to be busy, in your next dream.Tahu: Oh, and I guess Onua wasn't a wimp after all.GaliGee: I've never thought he was. So then what happened?Tahu: I ran to Ga-Koro to make sure Gali had made it home again. And --GaliGee: Wait a minute. Why did you keep walking Gali back to Ga-Wahi, if a Nuva is capable of defending the entire island by himself - or herself?Tahu: Oh, Gali can defend Mata Nui, and herself, from just about anything. Except, say, Kopaka's incompetence. Or Lewa's pranks.GaliGee: Lewa was in your dream, too?Tahu: Yes. I was just getting to that part. I crested the hill, and saw Gali on the beach in Ga-Wahi. But Lewa swooped down on those Katana wings and wrapped his legs around her waist, and flew away with her! Man, was I mad.GaliGee: Why was that so bad?Tahu: He was risking the safety of another Toa! And I don't trust his motives. He's always messing with her. Luckily, she always beats the stuffing out of him. But this looked really dangerous. So I ran along behind them, only I couldn't keep up. Eventually Lewa flew back to Ga-Koro with her and set her down again. And then he flew away. I figured he would head to Le-Wahi, so I went there.GaliGee: Maybe he was just taking Gali on a tour of the island. Sharing his flying powers, so she could get a new perspective.Tahu: Remember, we're talking about LEWA here, GaliGee. I doubt it.GaliGee: You guys are so suspicious of each other! With his Miru Nuva, I'm sure she was safe.Tahu: I WISH I could trust the other Toa. But I have to be realistic. So I got to Le-Wahi, and spotted Lewa. When he started to land, I directed a jet of flame up at him. He rose on the heated air current and tumbled out of control from the turbulence. It was pretty funny. He started to flip and spin, so I just kept shooting fire at him.GaliGee: How mean!Tahu [laughs]: It's about time Lewa was on the receiving end of a practical joke, I'd say.GaliGee: Then what?Tahu: I heard something whistling through the air, and I looked just in time for a huge boulder to bounce off my Hau. It flew through the jet of fire, and exploded into chunks of flaming magma. I looked around, and there was Pohatu, frowning at me.GaliGee: For risking another Toa's safety, no doubt.Tahu: Oh, Lewa can take it. You should hear about the tricks he's played on me! Some of them have really been hilarious. Anyway, he spun himself free of the jet and landed. Pohatu yelled at Lewa and sent him home, and then he started to lecture me. But I asked him to kick me another boulder. That was so cool!GaliGee: Did he do it?Tahu: Yeah! He started firing these big rocks at me, and I whacked them away with my swords. It looked like a meteor shower. We were laughing so hard. Then, when I bent over to flick off a piece of half-melted stone that was stuck in my blade, I heard a big boulder zing past my back. I felt the wind from it, it was so close. I stared swearing at Pohatu. But he pointed behind me, and there was a Bahrag, the red one. I forget her name - Gahdok, I think. The rock had knocked her hideous chicken head right off.GaliGee: So Pohatu really was helping you!Tahu: I felt so stupid. He said, "Last time I smashed a Bahrag for you, you seemed to think it was a GOOD thing." I remembered what he had done for me in the Borhok nest, and I apologized for snapping at him. At least I won't have to track HIM down in my next dream! And then I woke up in Ta-Koro, for real.GaliGee: What about Lewa? Will you --Tahu: What, are you my mom? OK, I'll find him in my dream and apologize to him, too. You just can't stand for us to stay mad at each other, can you?.GaliGee: Anger is useful, when properly directed. But holding a grudge -- that rarely is.Tahu: Now, don't lecture me about anger! Don't you think I get enough of that from Gali? She's always trying to cool me down!GaliGee: Well, on the subject of Gali… you seem to be very protective of her.Tahu: She's swimming with the sharks around here, GaliGee. And I don't mean the Takea.GaliGee: Tahu, you seem to be the one who has the best chance of romance with her. Are you ever going to start anything?Tahu: You think so? I mean, no, I couldn't do that, it would be… even though she IS very lovely... Well, I considered it at one point, but it really wouldn't be wise. How could I be an effective leader if it's obvious I favor one of my troops above the others? None of us Toa could defend Mata Nui properly if we were sidetracked by that kind of thing. So, um, no. No way.GaliGee: I see.Tahu: You have no idea what it's like for us. Ever since we've been here we've faced one horrible swarm of enemies after another. And elemental disasters, one after another. We all have love for each other and for our people, and that's what keeps us going. But we can't be indulging in sentiment.GaliGee: Well, you Toa are doing a wonderful job of protecting Mata Nui. The Matorans will be forever grateful, I'm sure.Tahu: Yeah, those little guys are terrific.GaliGee: If the Great Beings ever grant you peace, will you and Gali --Tahu: Gaaah! Stop it! I don't want to think about her any more. It's ruining my concentration as a warrior.GaliGee: Sorry, Tahu. I know you need to stay focused.Tahu: She's just so… [sighs]GaliGee: She's so what?Tahu: Would you stop talking about her, already?GaliGee [laughs]: Sure, Tahu. Well, thanks for telling us about your dream. And I hope things go better between you Toa. It sounds like you might need each other's help sometime soon.Tahu: That's what Gali keeps saying. Nooo! I did it again.GaliGee: Uh, see you, Tahu.Tahu: Bye, Gali. Aaaah! I mean, GaliGee. [click]Forgiveness may be elusive for the Toa at this point. Will their common goal force them to get along eventually? I hope so, for Mata Nui's sake! If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Summer 2 : 18Well, here’s how it went today.Turaga Vakama shook me awake. I was really incoherent at first, but as I stared at his glowing firestaff, I remembered that Jala and I had finished the Wall late the night before, and this was the day it was to be read to the entire population of the island. Turaga Vakama waited until I stopped mumbling to myself, and then he said, “Congratulations, Takua! You did a wonderful job on the Wall of History. Well, you and Jala, anyway.”“Thanks,” I nodded, wondering when he had noticed us working together. “He was a huge help.”“You really had me nervous near the end,” the Turaga frowned. “On several occasions, I was tempted to send a couple other Matoran down to help you out. But my faith in you was justified, because you did find a way to get it done.”“You... you were watching me?” I said uneasily.“With such an important job in the hands of someone with a rather, shall we say, spotty record when it comes to responsibility...” His red eyes narrowed slightly behind his Kanohi. Suddenly I realized that his reputation had been on the line, too, with everyone coming to hear the reading. “I’m sorry to have caused you to worry, Turaga.”“No harm done, Takua,” he reassured me, patting my arm. “I’m just glad it’s finished.”“So am I,” I agreed. “What do I need to do today?”“Nothing. You just have to sit in the crowd and enjoy the tale you’ve so beautifully composed and recorded for the future. The Turaga will take turns reading it to everyone.”I lay back in my bed with relief. “Good,” I smiled, closing my eyes.“That doesn’t mean you can go back to sleep now,” he growled. “Get up and get some breakfast. The others will be in the village in about half an hour.”I groaned and sat up as he shuffled out the door of my hut. But I’ll take physical fatigue over anxiety and dread, any day. So I stumbled down to the dining hall and joined my friends. They were all excited to see me. Jala looked almost as tired as I was, but he had a big grin on his yellow Hau. As we stood in line to get our bowls of steaming mashed Yola root, he said, “The sentries have already spotted the Ga-Koronans a few kios from the gate.”“Well, they would have come all this way for nothing, if you hadn’t helped me,” I replied. “I couldn’t have done it without you, Jala.”He laughed. “What are friends for?”We finished eating and went down to the Wall to find a place to sit in the area marked off with reddish stones for Ta-Koro. Jala gestured for me and Kapura to join him at the end of the back row, since we might be called on to come forward. Toa Tahu walked up to me and slapped me on the back. “Well done, Chronicler,” he laughed gruffly. “I stopped by early this morning and read some of your work. You really have a gift with words.”I thanked him for the compliment, infinitely grateful he hadn’t come by an hour earlier to find Jala and me chipping feverishly to finish the thing. He strode to the front of the group to talk with Turaga Vakama, and we Matoran sat down.A few minutes later the other denizens of Mata Nui began to pour in. The Toa and Turaga gathered in the front of the crowd and exchanged greetings. Toa Gali waved to me, and I smiled sheepishly back at her. The Matoran sat in groups by village, forming a semi-circle in front of the wall. I noticed that Maku slipped into the ranks of the Po-Koronans to sit next to Huki, though.The Turaga of Fire motioned for everyone to be quiet. In a solemn voice, he welcomed the guests. He began with a brief summary of the events of the Bohrok War, and then he introduced Turaga Nokama, who was the first to read. It was amazing to hear my words come to life in that clear, fluid voice. It seemed so long ago that I had carved them, even though it had been only two weeks. I listened with apprehension at first, wishing I had gone back and re-read everything for errors. Then it occurred to me that if Turaga Vakama had really been keeping an eye on me, he might have read it all himself. So I relaxed a little and watched the blue village elder. Her usual reserve was replaced by expressive gestures as she relived the drama of our noble protectors hunting down the cold-hearted creatures who had rendered them powerless.Turaga Nokama finished her part at the point where Toa Tahu, Toa Lewa, Jala, and I were trekking through Ko-Koro. She took a little bow and sat down, and Turaga Onewa began to read. His voice, gravelly yet steady as his element, gave the words a different feeling than the water Turaga’s had. While hers evoked a lyrical legend steeped in the mystery of the past, his boldly defined a battle epic, giving an even more heroic quality to the action scenes. Occasionally he touched his fingers to the graven surface as if to feel the story directly from the stone. He ended with my vision of Toa Gali losing her powers, and our decision to go to her aid.Then Turaga Whenua took over, and this is where I started to have difficulty staying awake. His low, resonant, almost melodic tones had a soporific effect on me, like a distant humming through the earth. Even though the story was getting more and more intense, I found myself starting to nod off. Jala prodded me awake on more than one instance. Finally, the word ‘lunch’ seeped through my fading awareness, and I realized everyone was standing to take a break for the midday meal. I staggered to my feet and followed the crowd to the dining hall.We got our food and sat down. The main course was fresh roasted meat smothered in the spicy sauce that Aodhan makes from crushed dried Hoto. The side dishes were from Le-Koro—tender Kele shoots and Papuka nuts. Jala saved me a place at a table with Nixie, Hahli, Amaya, and Kai. Lito and Raku saw us and came to sit there, too.Nixie’s Pakari was radiant with excitement. “I’m so proud of you, Takua,” she beamed. “That whole long story carved onto the wall in only two weeks! And it’s so wonderful to hear. Your words really make me picture the whole thing in my mind’s eye.”I thanked her and told her it was Jala who had made it all possible. He smiled modestly.The conversation mostly revolved around the reading we had just heard. Jala filled everyone in on the funny details I had omitted. I was glad he felt like talking, because I didn’t. Then he asked Hahli to tell us about catching the big Ruki. She began in a shy, quiet voice, but by the end of the story she was animated, waving her arms and making sound effects for the wind and waves. Then there was some discussion of a rumor that the Turaga were planning to hold a giant island-wide koli tournament. Jala kidded me that I should use that somersault move I had done at the Kini-Nui, and I wanted to disappear under the table. Then Lito exclaimed in dismay as he realized that Kai had slipped a bunch of Kele shoots into his shoulder armor, and we all had a good laugh.Soon the meal was over, and we reassembled for the second half of the Kal saga. To our delight, Hahli and Nixie sneaked into our row and sat on either side of me and Jala.Turaga Nuju began to read in his bizarre language of whistles and clicks, pausing to let Matoro interpret. But after a while Matoro just started reading the wall himself while the Turaga kept making his odd sounds. After all, it was really Turaga Nuju who was doing the translating. Since I knew more or less what he was saying without listening to Matoro, I tried to decipher his language, and this helped me stay awake. Because otherwise, sitting still after a big meal with so little sleep would have had me napping in no time. I figured out his sounds for Bohrok and Toa, but that was about it. The Ice Turaga’s impassive mask actually showed some enthusiasm when he recounted the part about the combat lesson Jala gave to the Toa. He finished with Toa Tahu’s unsuccessful attempt to lead a swarm of Tahnok against the Nuhvok-Kal. Toa Tahu leaned his head on his hand, frowning at no one in particular.Turaga Matau took over, and things got more entertaining. The air village elder’s amusing speech pattern crept in when he started telling the part of the story where Toa Tahu, Toa Lewa, and the the Le-Koronans used branch and rock traps to thwart the Nuhvok-Kal. It was obvious he was paraphrasing and embellishing my text, and we Matoran started glancing at each other. He started talking about how the “waddle-shell weight-bug” had gotten “all snarl-mean and hop-mad,” and Turaga Vakama loudly cleared his throat.“What?” asked Turaga Matau innocently. “It WAS hop-mad!”“Just read the Wall,” grumbled the Fire Turaga, glaring at someone who was snickering in the front row. So his green colleague rolled his eyes and continued, this time sticking to the script. He ended with the illusion walls Makuta had set up before the Toa fell into the cave with the Rahi-Nui. Of course, there was no mention of Makuta in this saga at all. I had transcribed the incident as Turaga Vakama had when he told the story to us villagers, using roundabout language to suggest that the Toa had worn out the huge beast and omitting our leader’s noble actions entirely. But I shivered as I remembered the bizarre patch of utter darkness I had encountered on the way, those creepy red eyes on the cave wall, and that horrible grating voice. Jala glanced at me meaningfully.Finally, Turaga Vakama told the last part of the story. His confidence as he read my words about the Toa defeating the Rahi Nui made me certain he had come down to the Wall to read it before anyone else got a chance to see it. I wondered if he had been hanging around with his Huna activated while I had been carving. It made me feel reassured and uneasy at the same time.He got to the last scene of the saga, when the Toa had confronted the Kal as they put the stolen power symbols into the lock to free the queens of the swarms. I remembered the intensity of my vision, the only time I had ever seen the Toa—the ones we relied on to keep us safe—looking so completely bereft of hope. In my mind I could picture Toa Lewa saying, “Then we have failed our people,” and Toa Gali nodding sadly. Toa Onua was looking at the ground, and Toa Kopaka’s Akaku was even more grim than usual. Even Toa Pohatu seemed resigned to their inevitable doom.And then that strange feeling came over me, as it did in Ga-Koro when I leaped in front of the Pahrak. I couldn’t stand by and watch my friends suffer helplessly. So I jumped into the gap between the Toa and the Kal. I reached back and pulled a koli staff out of my pack, and I aimed it at the creatures. My jaw clenched resolutely, I willed it to fire. A blast of brilliant power surged from the end, instantly knocking all the Kal flat on their backs. The Toa sprang forward and claimed their symbols from the cube, and the Bahrag shrieked in frustration as their prison of protodermis fibers tightened around them again and their eyes grew dim. Toa Tahu hoisted my small body effortlessly onto his broad shoulders, and a huge crowd of Matoran all around us began to cheer. “Hooray for the Toa!” “Hooray for Takua!”I heard Jala’s voice, and then Nixie’s, saying my name over the sound of shouting and applause. My eyes snapped open, and my head was resting on something blue. Then I realized it was Nixie’s shoulder, and I sat up with a start. I was back in the audience at the Wall. Evidently the reading was over, and Turaga Vakama was looking right at me, and so was the rest of the crowd. Everyone started laughing.I stumbled to my feet and tried to get my mouth to work. “Thanks to the, uh, bravery and quick thinking of the Toa, we’re here to celebrate a victory,” I finally stammered. “And thanks to my friend Jala, and Turaga Vakama, we can now read about it on the Wall.” Then I sat down, wishing I had never been built.Turaga Vakama shook his head with amusement. Then he announced that in one week, there would be a Naming Ceremony in Po-Koro. Finally, he invited everyone to the party that had been prepared in the courtyard of the fire village. We all stood and began to file out of the hall.Still woozy and disoriented from my dream, I responded to the barrage of compliments from the other Matoran. “Good work, Takua,” smiled Kapura. “Awesome job on the Wall, dude!” yelled Lito. “That was the best tale the Turaga have ever told,” commented Kotu. “Nice work on the carving,” nodded Hafu.I was swept along by the multitude toward the party, but I really didn’t feel like being there. All I wanted to do was find Nixie and apologize. Finally I saw her across the room and wove my way over to her. When I got there, I hesitated for a moment, and then the words tumbled out. “I’m so sorry I embarrassed you. You must really hate me now. And I probably got you in trouble with your Turaga, too.”“Well, Turaga Nokama did give me a gentle scolding, but that’s her job,” she said with a wry smile. “And I’m still proud of you.” She reached over and touched my arm.I blinked in wonder at her forgiving attitude. Then Kai came over and announced that the Le-Koronan band was about to start up, and they invited me to come dance with them. But I politely declined and tottered up the stairs to my hut, where I sit, writing. I can hear the band, and they sound great, but I’m not about to go back down there.Now that I’ve recounted my latest humiliation, I’m going to sleep. If I had had the self-discipline to pace myself intelligently on the Wall project, I would be down there enjoying the party with my friends. But I’m too weary and disgusted with myself to care at this point. I came really close to forcing Turaga Vakama to intervene, and then I brought embarrassment to the girl I’ve been trying to impress for so long.Well, at least everyone seemed to enjoy the story. I guess maybe I do have some kind of gift for bringing history to light. I should thank Mata Nui that I’m not completely worthless after all. I guess he’s known it all along, and that’s why he made me Chronicler.Summer 2 : 19Ah, the exquisite luxury of sleeping late.When I finally woke today, it was lunchtime. I ambled down to the dining hall, where my arrival was announced by cheerful shouts of “Chronicler!” I waved at them, still slightly uncomfortable after what happened yesterday.Raku and Lito were on their way out. They’re both working night shift this week, so they had just gotten up, too. They invited me to surf with them after lunch, and I gladly accepted.As they left to get our boards, Jala spotted me. “Hey, sleepyhead!” he teased. “Everyone missed you at the party. Nixie was really worried about you.”“Really?” I asked incredulously, setting down my bowl. “I figured she wouldn’t want anything to do with me now.”“Naw. She was afraid you had made yourself ill with too much work,” smiled Jala. “I think she likes you. She kept going on about how great your story was.”“How did YOU manage to stay awake?”He grinned. “I didn’t! I went to bed a couple hours after you did. But I did have the chance to show Hahli around the village first, to look at all the improvements.” I glanced up, and suddenly I noticed that the dining hall was much bigger. Out the doorway I could see the Atrium had been enlarged as well. Jala continued, “She especially loved the koli stadium. It’s not even finished yet, but already it’s really impressive. You should go check it out, now that you’re newly unemployed.”I nodded. A lot of things had happened in two weeks, apparently. Raku and Lito came back in with their lava boards, and I asked Jala if he wanted to come, too. To my surprise, he eagerly assented. After he gulped down his lunch, he ran off to tell his lieutenants their afternoon orders and get his board.“I’ve never seen the Captain surf, but I’ve heard he’s really good,” Raku remarked. I didn’t doubt this, because I’ve seen plenty of proof of Jala’s natural athletic ability.“Well, I guess we’re about to find out,” shrugged Lito.When Jala returned, we all set out for the Big Surge, just downstream of the Kalala Lava Cave. The rumors were true. Jala explained that he had been an avid surfer before his job responsibilities completely took over his life during the time of the infected Rahi. He seemed a little out of practice at first, but soon he was sailing over the waves with the utmost confidence. I traded boards with him so he could try a longer one, and he mastered the new conditions within minutes.Raku and Lito were acting a bit self-conscious at first to be surfing with their boss. But they began to relax when they saw how much fun he was having. Our mouths dropped open when Jala caught a really huge wave and disappeared into a tunnel of lava. He came out the other side, smiling broadly, and rode my board onto the bank. We all cheered.Then I realized someone was clapping behind us, and I turned to see Turaga Vakama. “Bravo, Captain,” he chuckled. “I’m glad you’re getting a chance to relax for once. And Takua, I see your friends are doing a fine job of helping you remember the pleasures of the fire region.”We all nodded politely. Then the Turaga got a thoughtful look on his mask. “Jala, the spirit of Lhii lives on in you, in so many ways,” he mused.Jala blinked. We had all heard mention of this legendary surfer named Lhii, but the village elder had never actually told us his story. It had become practically a tradition, whenever he brought up this venerable name, for someone to ask him to tell us more, even though he always declined. This time it was Raku. “When will you tell us his story, Turaga?”“Someday. Probably not anytime soon.” But then, to our delight, Turaga Vakama actually dropped a couple of hints. “His full name was Lhikan. And he saved my life with his board. Twice.” Then he turned and walked away.We surfers looked at each other excitedly. Finally, a morsel of information about Lhii—or rather, Lhikan. And it was a juicy bit, too. He had used his lava board to save Turaga Vakama! That certainly gave our sport a new respectability.As he stood silhouetted by the sunlight in the enormous cave opening, Turaga Vakama called back to me, “Takua, tomorrow morning you are to report to the lava fields. You can’t play all the time, you know.”“Yes, Turaga.” I forced a smile.So it’s back to the grind again for me. But that’s all right. I suppose being a Chronicler is a part-time job, and when nothing is happening, I need to be contributing to the village in some other way. Well, it was fun while it lasted.Summer 2 : 20Today was pure misery.First off, I had to get up early. Puku nudged me awake, and when I heard the cleanup clatter from the dining room, I realized I was late. So I barely had time to choke down a few scraps from the serving pans. And then I had to run all the way to the lava fields, arriving all out of breath and flustered to get my work orders.Aft sent me to join Aodhan’s team, digging a new diversion channel to fill a reservoir of magma to be forged into tools. Since I didn’t remember anything at all about lava farming after losing my memory, it was a suitably simple-minded task. It was boring drudgery, just as I anticipated, but once I figured out what I was doing and got into a rhythm, I could daydream.The purity and consistency of the material was of the highest importance, so the channel had to be very clean and straight. Some hard-working individual had to actually pay attention to his job long enough to discover the pure source high on the volcano, and some other hard-working individual had to figure out how deep and wide the channel had to be, given the slope of the ground and the thermal properties of the stone, lava, and air, so that it would stay molten and flow freely until it got to the tank. But as for me, I could just chop stupidly at the ground until the ditch was as deep as Aodhan told me to make it. So my mind could wander freely to more interesting things, like what kind of surfing moves this legendary Lhikan could do, or whether Nixie really did like me in spite of my idiocy.After lunch, things went from mediocre to intolerable. Aft assigned me to Tiribomba’s group, which maintains the pumps that circulate the lava in the tanks. The work—walking around checking fluid levels, applying grease to the occasional groaning gear shaft, and patching leaks in the piping—wasn’t so bad, even though I did have to pay attention. The problem was my supervisor. It was Tupako.Well, as I expected, the first thing he did was taunt me. “Oh, it’s Takua, the amateur astrologer. Been observing any celestial bodies lately?”I shook my head and asked what I was supposed to do. He led me around, taking every opportunity to insult my work as Chronicler, my koli playing, and the color of my Kanohi. (He didn’t say anything about the shape, at least, because he’s got an orange Pakari.) I finally stopped asking questions even when I was confused about something, because every answer was prefaced by a remark about my ignorance. I figured I would just find someone else to ask later.So he left me alone for a while, and I did my rounds. After fixing a few minor problems, I came upon a broken pipe gushing lava at an alarming rate. I grabbed a sheet of protodermis, some clamps, and my tools and got to work. But as I tightened the fasteners, the pipe split open further upstream. I managed to scramble up a ladder right before the cave flooded.Tupako, standing on a catwalk above me, started shouting. He shut down the offending pump, all the while spouting a tirade about what kind of Gukko-brain would try to patch a pipe before turning off the machinery first. And the sad part is, I had wanted to ask him about that earlier, but I just didn’t have the heart to listen to another rant about my incompetence.Fortunately for me, Aft’s pet Hikaki gave a long shriek to signal the end of the shift. I was more than happy to let the leak become someone else’s problem.In the dining room tonight, Jala listened attentively to my woes. Tiribomba was sitting with us, too. He told me not to feel bad about what had happened. Evidently that pipe run was constantly springing leaks, and the whole section was overdue for replacement. “Keep your chin up,” advised Jala. But I’m not looking forward to tomorrow.Summer 3 : 1I showed up at work on time today, just so Tupako would have one less excuse to yell at me. I figured he would find enough other things to complain about. And I was right.First, I got a long harangue about how much damage I had caused yesterday, and how long he had stayed after the end of the shift to re-route the flows around the ruptured pipe section. Then he shoved a pickaxe into my hands and told me to chip out all the rock that had solidified before he could bail the lava out of the flooded pump room. Even though I resented his tone, I felt sorry for him, because he had obviously worked hard to correct my mistake. So I attacked the stone with vigor, and by mid-morning my arms were aching. I acted as if nothing was bothering me, though.Then Tupako got me to help him replace the most heavily damaged pipe sections. He measured and cut the new pipe while I handed him his tools and acted as a living clamp to hold things in place. Without any explanation of what we were doing, at first I had a hard time guessing what he wanted next. But after a couple of sections were in place, I started to figure out the routine, and I was able to anticipate whether he wanted a measuring stick, a pair of pliers, a sheet of protodermis, or a heatstone. This cut down on the amount of growling on his part.Still, it was a big relief to see my friends at lunch and be able to smile again. I noticed that after exchanging a few words with Tiribomba, Tupako sat down by himself to eat. As grumpy as that guy is, it was no surprise to me. He finished his meal quickly and rushed out of the dining hall, probably to get back to work.I walked over to Tiribomba’s table. “Is there any way I could trade jobs with someone? I’m having a really hard time getting along with Tupako.”Tiribomba shrugged. “Join the club, Takua. But you might as well forget about a trade. No one wants your job.”In the afternoon, Tupako sent me to do my rounds again. Since we had spent all morning on major repairs, there were plenty of small leaks to keep me busy. The time passed quickly with no big mishaps. At the end of the shift Tupako and I found ourselves walking out of the lava farm together, so I got up the nerve to ask him a question. “Why didn’t we replace that whole pipe run? It seems like all of it—”The vehemence of his reply shut me up right away. “Because that’s all the pipe we had!” Then he started railing about Naming Day. “I bet you’re going to get a new name, just for hanging out with the Ga-Koronans and stumbling into the path of a Pahrak. Me, if I disappeared tomorrow, no one would have any new tools or weapons. But does anyone notice me slaving away down there in the pump room? Ha!” Fortunately, we caught up with some others on their way to the village, and he fell silent.After dinner I went to Turaga Vakama’s hut. He welcomed me warmly and invited me to sit down. I took a deep breath, explained my problems with Tupako, and respectfully requested a different assignment.The Turaga gazed thoughtfully at the flame dancing in the center of the hearth. “The sacred fire tells me you have yet something to learn from Tupako.”I groaned and stood up. If the sacred fire had anything to say about a subject, that was always the final word. At this point I almost hoped some new enemy will show up, just so I’d have an excuse to leave the village and chronicle something. Almost.But then I remembered another request I wanted to make of Turaga Vakama, and this time I was delighted with his reply. He gave me permission to interview the Toa and Turaga of each village!“That’s an excellent plan, Takua. I’m glad you’re so motivated to chronicle a few more of the many stories that have happened between the ones on the Wall. But you’ll have to do it on your own time,” he added.I was crestfallen. How could I get to another village, talk to two people, and get back during my one day of rest each weekend?“You could take two days instead, and do extra work on the other four that you are here,” the village elder suggested.“Could I… could I have some parts to rebuild Puku?” I asked hesitantly. “She could carry me all night while I sleep, if she were bigger and stronger.”“Not a bad idea,” he grinned. “After the renaming, I’ll see to it that you get that opportunity.”Then he agreed to let me interview him tomorrow after supper. Well, I walked on air back to my hut. I’m too excited to go to sleep. But I guess I’d better.Summer 3 : 2This morning passed quickly because I had so much on my mind. As I checked the lava tanks, I came up with a long list of questions to ask Turaga Vakama when I interview him tonight. Then I considered which ones he might actually answer, and the list became much shorter.I also thought ahead to the other Turaga and the Toa. Since they’re probably all busy with the rebuilding—every time I emerge from the smoking hole I call my workplace, I notice a new building or an enlarged foyer—I decided to focus on one simple two-part question: “At what times in your life have you been the proudest, and the most afraid?” That’s bound to elicit a few good adventure stories. And then, as time permits, I’ll ask them any other questions that come to mind.Then I started to daydream about the Naming Day ceremony. Jala says they change only the spelling of the honored Matoran’s name, not the way it’s spoken, so it really won’t matter except to add a few letters when I carve it into the Wall of History. I figure Huki and Hafu will get new names, and maybe Nuparu. But what Tupako said yesterday planted the idea in my head that maybe Jala’s and my names will be changed, too. How could they make them different without altering the sounds? Maybe Jaalha and Taakua or something. I wonder how Nixie will react. Will she turn to me, her pretty eyes lit up with joy for me when my name is announced? Or will she be avoiding my eyes altogether, sitting as far away as possible in her village’s section?After that I imagined all the ways I could rebuild Puku. I remember some of the extra pieces I saw while we Matoran were getting upgraded, so I can visualize it in my head. I’m thinking I’ll split my crab down the middle and add a broad, flat piece, so I’ll be able to lie down on her back. That’ll leave a gap beneath her shell, which I’ll fill with those connectors that store extra energy, so she’ll have more stamina. I’ll leave her main leg joints alone and extend each of her legs with one extra segment. Maybe I’ll double the first segment, too, to increase her strength. But these are just ideas. I might come up with a new design once I see what’s in the spare parts cave.I also thought about how to keep her calm so she won’t snap at me. Even though she trusts me, I doubt if she’ll just sit there when I start to pull her apart! And those claws can be pretty fearsome when she’s mad. Then I remembered something Tamaru told me. He knows all about plants and their uses, and he mentioned to me once that there’s a wild herb that makes you really sleepy. I’ll have to ask him to get me some of that.After lunch, my thoughts returned to what Turaga Vakama had said last night. I wondered what I could learn from Tupako. He’s a hard worker, and it’s certainly admirable how dedicated he is to his duty. But he doesn’t exactly inspire me to give it my all. His hard work doesn’t seem to bring him any joy whatsoever. He appears to be driven more by compulsion than by love of his fellow villagers or his Great Spirit. To me, his behavior proves that Duty is pretty worthless by itself.As I thought about all this, I suddenly realized how tired I’ve been for the last few days. And it’s not just the work. The way Tupako’s constantly criticizing, blaming, and insulting me has really been wearing on me. I know he’s right, that I’m a lazy, unreliable blockhead. But hearing about it over and over again is gradually pushing me toward despair. The only way I’ve avoided sliding into utter hopelessness is to ignore him and think about something more pleasant.My musings were interrupted by Tupako’s yelling. Evidently I had just walked past a huge leak in one of the trunk lines from the central tank to the foundry. I snapped to attention and ran to the pump control panel. The ancient machinery groaned and shuddered as I swung the giant valve shut. Then I went to the supply closet and retrieved my repair tools. After two attempts the patch held, and I started cleaning up the partially cooled lava that had gushed out. Under the crusty surface the interior was still molten, and the heat traveled up the handle of my shovel, burning my hands. But hey, I’m supposed to be learning devotion to Duty, right?Tupako started shouting again. “You shut the main valve, you moron! Why didn’t you just isolate that one line? Now the whole system is going to be clogged up!” He continued his rant as he turned various handles, pausing to glare at certain gages. “We’re going to be fixing your mistake all afternoon, Takua.”My heart sank as I watched him. I had once again made everything worse by not thinking things through. Poor Tupako, doing an impossible job with failing equipment and an incompetent helper. Suddenly I realized what it really was I was supposed to learn from him: humility. Now, I’ve never considered myself to be the proud sort of Matoran who likes to boast about his accomplishments. But it became painfully obvious I’ve been just as arrogant in my own way, refusing even to pay attention to the dangerous work we are supposed to be doing together. The answer to his constant criticism is not to ignore it, but to try harder. I took a deep breath and resigned myself to doing my job.The rest of the afternoon I applied myself to the task at hand, watching Tupako closely and asking questions, even if it meant getting a barrage of verbal abuse as a preface to each answer. And at the end of the day, I felt pretty good. Hard work is all right once in a while, after all. It felt like I had earned the right to eat dinner, to relax with my friends, and best of all, to interview Turaga Vakama.Naturally, this was the moment I had been waiting for all day long. He welcomed me, as usual, and gestured for me to sit next to him by the fire pit. He put his elbow on his knee and leaned forward. “So, what would you like to ask me, Chronicler?”“Well, it’s not what I would like to ask you, sir,” I began, “so much as what I think you might actually answer.”He laughed. “I’ll tell you what I can.”“All right. At what times in your life have you felt the most proud, and the most afraid?”Turaga Vakama scratched his long chin. “Well, for the first part of your question, there have been too many moments to count when I was bursting with pride in the steadfast Ta-Koronans for the way they’ve worked together to ward off far larger, more fearsome, and more numerous foes. Facing the infected Rahi and the Bohrok, they came up with brilliant and courageous plans, over and over again.”“Can you give me an example?”“Sure. Let’s see… how about the Battle of the Charred Forest?” He sat back on the bench, with his hands clasped around his knees and that faraway expression he always gets when he starts to tell a story. “That fight was drawn out for so long that it felt more like a war, actually. At first we didn’t know who our true foe even was. We thought the animals had simply gone mad with some sort of natural infection. So we resisted their attacks one by one, not realizing there was one sinister intelligence behind it all.“Communication among the Wahi was limited in those days, since each village had become isolated in its self-sufficiency. Rumor had it that the Le-Matoran were working on an herbal cure for the infection. A mild fever had struck the Gukko population at one point, and they were successful in suppressing it with Daikau extract, believe it or not. So they were hopeful they could find a remedy for this new affliction.”“You mean that nasty thing actually holds the cure for a disease?” I asked in disbelief. I remember Tamaru warning me about these carnivorous weeds whose woody jaw-like leaves can break your ankle. We once watched a Daikau close around a small Fikou, crushing it like a nutshell in its deadly grip.“Yes, Takua, even a very unpleasant creature can sometimes be useful,” he chuckled. I wondered for a moment if he was referring to Tupako. “Anyway, for some time we had been fairly successful in setting traps for the incidental crazed Rahi, like the one we accidentally caught Toa Tahu in. But then the pattern of Rahi attacks shifted suddenly, and that’s when I realized it wasn’t just crazed beasts acting on their own. The Hikaki, Hoto, and Ranama, in particular, would form a ring around a group of patrolling Matoran, increasing their own body heat to ignite the nearby trees all at once as if on a signal.”“When did you figure out who was behind it all?” I asked quietly.“Well, I was beginning to suspect it was Makuta about this time. As you know from the Rahi Nui fight, we Turaga have encountered Makuta before. But as you also know, you must keep that knowledge, and the knowledge that he continues to exist, to yourself,” he reminded me. I nodded solemnly.Turaga Vakama began to recount the Battle of the Charred Forest in great detail, and I scribbled notes as fast as I could write. Apparently, one day the Guard scouts reported huge numbers of fire Rahi gathering at the edge of the forest, all around the village. The beasts moved in closer, igniting fires as they moved. While lava farmers armed with shovels buried the flames that shot toward the village, and bucket brigades relayed sea water to the battle front, Jala sent small units to break through the lines, and they braved the searing heat to circle back behind the Rahi and strike. “They sowed enough confusion that the force of the attack was broken. But the infirmary was full of the fallen that dire day—victims of the very heat and flame that we Ta-Matoran have thrived on since the time before time.” The Turaga paused to pick up his firestaff. He turned it over in his hands while he continued. “In spite of the fear and pain, our will was not broken. That is why I am so proud of the Ta-Koronans.”“Wow,” I blinked, almost wishing I had been there to help at that point, instead of wandering meaninglessly across the island. After a moment of silence, I asked, “And what about the time in your life you were the most afraid?”Turaga Vakama sighed. He closed his eyes, then opened them again and fixed them on the fire. “I would have to say that was when I handed Toa Tahu the Great Mask of Time.”“Really? But weren’t you more afraid of the Bohrok-Kal and what they might do?”“Of course! That’s why I decided to go ahead and trust him with such a potent and dangerous tool. When I saw him lose his powers, I really feared the Bohrok might accomplish their mission. I’ll never forget the vision I saw so long ago in the sacred fire, when they rampaged across the surface of Mata Nui and left nothing but dead rock in their wake.”This made me wonder. “Turaga, what do you see in the sacred fire, exactly? You mentioned a vision… do the flames form images?”“Well,” he replied hesitantly, “it’s not the fire itself that creates the images. But I find that visions are more likely to come to me if I focus on the mesmerizing flicker of the flames. You have visions yourself, so you can probably imagine.”“Mine come at random times and places, when I least expect it,” I shrugged. “Visions are never random,” he corrected me. “Mine don’t always come when summoned, but I find it helps to sit in this place and clear my mind.” He explained that the very hottest lava always bubbled straight up out of the river here, and that’s why the village had been built in this location, with the Turaga’s hut in the center, its sacred fire fueled perpetually by the heat rising from the earth.I paused to look at the fire. “So, back to the Vahi,” I finally smiled. “Where did you get it?”“I’m afraid I can’t answer that, Takua,” he sighed.“Well, maybe you can answer this, then. How did you know its power? As a Turaga, you’ve never been able to use it, right?”He squinted at me. “True, a Turaga cannot access the power of a Great Mask. But that’s all I can say.”I seemed to be reaching a dead end, and it was getting late, so I decided I’d better wrap things up. I was very pleased that he had told me such entertaining stories. But I wondered about what happened in his life before the events he would freely share with us villagers. All his tales, except for the legend of Mata Nui, have happened within our memory—well, within everyone else’s memory—but we villagers all suspect he remembers things that happened many years before. “Turaga Vakama,” I asked cautiously, “are those really the proudest and most frightening moments in your life, or just during the part we’re supposed to know about?”A wide smile crossed the weathered orange Huna as his gaze dropped down to his hands. “Ah, Takua, you must not be so impatient. All will be brought to the light someday. And already you know more than the Matoran are supposed to know.” Then he looked me right in the eyes. “I know you’re probably tired of hearing that, with your thirst for truth. But more that I’ve ever allowed myself to be, I’m hopeful now that the time will be very soon.”This was really exciting! My mind started reeling at the prospect of more information about the Turaga’s past. Maybe it would clarify things that have happened since.So, now that I’ve written all this down tonight, at some point I can go back down to the Wall and carve a little section about these interviews. I’m sure Turaga Vakama won’t mind if I do a little extra work for a change. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Summer 1 : 15Before Jala went to sleep, he pointed to a small orange star and told me that as soon as it reached the eastern horizon, it would be time to wake everyone up. So I sat there watching the sky, trying not to think about all the things making strange whirring and chirping noises in the dark. Then it occurred to me that the things I should fear most would probably be silent. This sobering thought kept my eyes wide open for a couple of hours. But my fatigue began to overpower my worry, and I started to nod off. I tried desperately to stay awake by slapping my own mask every now and then. Then I went and sat on a really pointy, uncomfortable rock. The star was finally getting close to the horizon when a big fog bank rolled in. I was sitting there wondering if I should just go ahead and wake the others, when Toa Lewa sat up.He greeted me cheerfully. I asked him if we should wake the others, and he held a finger to his mask. He stood next to Jala, who began to float off the ground. I suppressed a laugh as I watched my friend try to turn over in his sleep. His arms flailed in the air, and he cried, “Look, Hahli, I can fly!” Then his eyes snapped open.Toa Lewa and I burst out laughing. Jala caught his breath, his eyes wide, as Toa Lewa lowered him gently to the ground. “Oh, man, that was cold,” muttered Jala. But our mirth was contagious, and he couldn’t help but laugh with us.Meanwhile, the other Toa had woken up. Toa Tahu looked mildly amused when I told him what Toa Lewa had done. Toa Kopaka gave me a fleeting smile, then said, “We’ve got some ground to cover today.” He took the handful of dried fruit I was offering, ate it in one gulp, and started after the Kal’s footprints again. The rest of us scrambled after him, stuffing our breakfast in our mouths as we walked. Toa Lewa hoisted me onto his back, but Jala decided to walk for a while.Back on the trail, the Team with Personality made good time. I lay my head down on Toa Lewa’s shoulders, but his bouncy gait made it difficult to rest. Jala watched my bobbing head and suggested I try Toa Kopaka instead. “He’s the best to sleep on,” he advised me.Toa Kopaka picked me up, and Jala was right. The movements of the Toa of Ice are so efficient that no effort is ever wasted. He moved forward with a long, smooth stride, and in no time I was sound asleep.When I woke again, we were deep in the jungle. Toa Kopaka felt me stirring and gently set me down. “We’re getting close,” he whispered to the others as they caught up. “In fact,” he added, adjusting his Akaku, “they’re only a few hundred bios ahead. We need to walk quietly.” With his shared mask power, we could see a group of tiny, fuzzy shapes that stood out against the fairly uniform background of the forest.The party resumed the trail, creeping cautiously through the underbrush. Toa Lewa took the lead, soundlessly slicing through vines and branches. Soon he turned to confer with the rest of us. “They’re flock-gathered around a krana,” he whispered. “This would be a good chance-time.”“That’s not a krana, Lewa,” breathed Toa Kopaka. We watched for a moment, and sure enough, I could barely see the shape of what looked like an Akaku Nuva.“It’s a Kanohi!” exclaimed Toa Tahu. Toa Kopaka gestured for him to be quiet.The Gahlok-Kal pulled the mask loose from a boulder. Then the Pahrak-Kal raised its hand shields and blasted a hole in the boulder. The Gahlok-Kal shoved the mask into the hole and stepped back as the Pahrak-Kal approached the rock again.“They’re going to hide-seal it inside that rock!” gasped Toa Lewa. “And with no powers—”“Not if we get in there and grab it first,” muttered Toa Tahu, pulling his swords off his back.Toa Kopaka put his hand on Toa Tahu’s arm to stop him. “The plan,” he reminded the Toa of Fire in a low voice. The others nodded, and the Toa mobilized immediately, changing to their Huna and surrounding the Kal. On Toa Lewa’s whistled signal, they all switched to the Mahiki. Suddenly a dozen Toa stood around the clearing, weapons drawn.The Kal reacted nonchalantly, as they had before. They turned, their backs to each other, and began to fire at the imaginary Toa. Toa Lewa whistled again, and the real Toa sprang into the center of the Kal circle. With the same smoothness they had exhibited in practice, our heroes brandished their blades and began to attack their adversaries. I smiled as I realized what they were doing. The Kal’s ranged powers were far too dangerous to use in close quarters, especially since the Toa had maneuvered them into a position where they would be firing at each other.This time, when Toa Lewa’s blow was blocked by the Nuhvok-Kal’s gravity shields, he was ready with the other blade, going for the undefended gap. With a deft twist, he flipped open the creature’s head plate. A swift kick dislodged the krana and sent it flying into the bushes.Toa Tahu was having a bit more difficulty. The Gahlok-Kal threw the Akaku at his mask, catching him off guard. He deflected the flying object with his sword, but in the meantime the Kal of Magnetism fixed his feet to the ground with a short burst of its power. As he twisted to free himself, Toa Tahu saw the Lehvak-Kal behind him, drawing in air with its hand shields. Toa Tahu threw himself onto the dirt, and the blue Kal found itself being blasted by high-pressure air intended for its foe. Using his new Pakari to resist the fading magnetic pull, Toa Tahu rolled over and jabbed his sword upward under the edge of the Lehvak-Kal’s head plate, launching its krana.Toa Kopaka left the Pahrak-Kal he had just hacked open and pursued the Gahlok-Kal. His sword clanged against the creature’s hand shields, and he quickly spun around, slicing open its head plate. But behind him, the Tahnok-Kal was pointing its hand shields at him.“Come on!” urged Jala, pulling my disk off my back and shoving it into my hand. We ran into the clearing and hurled our disks at the Tahnok-Kal. The surprised mechanical bug spun around to see the source of the annoyance. Toa Lewa did a back flip and landed on its head, knocking it to the ground before it could fire at us. Then he kicked open the Kal’s head plate, and the krana tumbled out.“You have no idea how lucky we are,” panted Jala, no doubt remembering what it was like to be electrified.The weakness of the Toa’s strategy suddenly became obvious. Subduing five out of six mighty foes sounds like quite an accomplishment for three powerless Toa. But one Kal on the loose was enough to doom the plan. And one Kal had ducked out of the fray and was standing out of sword reach: the Kohrak-Kal.Toa Kopaka desperately hurled his swords at the Kohrak-Kal, but it dodged them, and the blades stuck in the tree behind it. A deafening noise filled the air, silencing the birds and insects. The very air and earth began to vibrate as the whine increased to a howl. Overwhelmed, I stumbled to my knees, clutching my head. Blackness closed around me.I felt something rough dragging across my Kanohi. I opened my eyes and looked into a familiar face. It was Puku! I suppose she must have heard the racket the Kal had made. And my loyal crab had come to find me. Laughing as she licked my mask, I reached up and hugged her eye stalks.I pulled myself up, groggily, and leaned on Puku. My head was throbbing, but the sight of my friends, along with the shafts of yellow light from the late afternoon sun shining into the clearing, cheered me up a bit. Jala was rubbing his head. “Takua!” he cried joyfully when he saw me sitting up. “Now everyone is all right.”Toa Tahu was pacing. “We almost did it,” he muttered. “Where did we go wrong?”“Look at this!” exclaimed Toa Lewa. “The foot-tracks have wander-split!” He disappeared into the underbrush and reappeared a few moments later. “Yes, the power-bugs have divided into two groups. One has gone back lava-ward, and the other is continuing jungle-bound.”“We should get our masks before we fight them again,” said Toa Kopaka. He was scanning the bushes, apparently looking for the Akaku.“If the Kal are trying to hide them, they must think they would be of value to us against them,” replied Toa Tahu. “But we shouldn’t stop following them just to look.”“The blade-skill practice you gave us really helped, little firespitter,” remarked the Toa of Air, patting Jala’s shoulder. “I don’t think we would have krana-robbed any of them without it, since they’re getting battle-wise to our tricks now. They didn’t linger-look at the illusions for very long. Now that they’ve wander-split apart, our luck-chance might be better. If we had had the other Toa with us just now, I think we might have—say, what’s that, ice-brother?”Toa Kopaka was staring up a tall tree. His Akaku zoomed in, and sure enough, there was the new Akaku, lodged in a fork at the very top of it.Toa Tahu looked up. “If I had my fire powers, I could burn down the tree, but…”“If I could still high-fly, it would be ground-bound already,” sighed Toa Lewa. “I suppose the Nuhvok-Kal must have back-twisted gravity to get it up there. But I can’t float-rise quite that high with a Miru. I guess I’ll just do it the hard-way, and climb halfway up first.” He began to scramble up the tree.Toa Kopaka changed to his Komau and followed a passing Nui-Rama with his eyes. The giant insect suddenly swerved, plunging into the top of the tree. It plucked the mask out of the foliage with its claws and swooped down toward us. Jala and I dove for cover, and the other two Toa backed away, leaving Toa Kopaka alone in the clearing. He held out his hand, and the Rama set the Akaku right in his palm. Then it buzzed straight up, leveled out, and disappeared into the distance.Toa Kopaka handed Toa Lewa the mask as he dropped out of the tree. “Thanks! I’m speechless!” marveled the green Toa.“See to it that you remain that way,” replied Toa Kopaka with a sideways glance.It was already getting dark. Puku and I went into the woods, where I stacked some firewood onto her back. We even found some Bula berries, and I heaped the sweet, juicy fruit onto my disk to carry back to camp while Puku gorged herself straight off the bush. We built a big fire and ate the berries and some dried fish. We were all really hungry, so no one spoke during dinner.Now we’re just sitting and talking and watching the fire. The discussion of the Toa is going in circles. Toa Kopaka is insisting the three of them should split up and look for the masks. Toa Tahu is saying if they stick together, they can share the masks, so finding them doesn’t matter right now. We should pick one group of Kal and follow it. And Toa Lewa is saying that we should find the other Toa and get them to follow the other group. Toa Kopaka says it’s easier for them to find us, with two Kakama among them. “And that’s exactly why we each need to look for our own Kanohi,” he added. “Chained together for the sake of mask powers, our options are limited.”Having spoken, Toa Kopaka stood up and found a soft, mossy piece of ground, well away from the fire, on which to lie down. I get the impression he’s pretty tired of the other two Toa. Being with them for a few days, he’s probably heard more conversation than he gets in a month in Ko-Koro.It’s Jala’s turn to keep watch, so I’m curling up between Puku’s claws and getting some sleep.Summer 1 : 16Early this morning when I woke up, Toa Lewa and Toa Tahu were arguing, and Jala was just trying not to fall asleep long enough to eat some breakfast. Puku had scrounged up some bugs for herself. I asked Jala where Toa Kopaka was. He said, “Toa Kopaka woke up, nodded to me, and started to walk off. I asked him where he was going, and he said, ‘Away.’ He took a few more steps before he turned around and thanked me for the sword fighting lesson. And then he strode off into the jungle.”“Well, I say good riddance.” Toa Tahu stood up and looked at Toa Lewa. “You have an Akaku, anyway, so we don’t need him. Let’s just go waylay one party of Bohrok-Kal. I say we follow the ones headed for Ta-Wahi.”“Speaking of power-masks,” said Toa Lewa, swinging himself into a tree, “I agree with Kopaka. I think we should seek-find some more of them before we fight the Kal again. Last time we had a battle-plan that used all we have—our noble masks and our new sword-skills—and they still sorry-blasted us. The odds are better, even with one fewer war-blade on our side, but as long as we’re outnumbered at all...”“With that attitude, Lewa—” Tahu began, but he was interrupted when a reddish-orange blur appeared in our midst. Toa Pohatu appeared, and Toa Tahu said, “Well, there you go. Our odds just improved again. What news do you bring, Pohatu? Did you find the Bahrag? And where are the others?”Toa Pohatu smiled. “Hello, everyone. I don’t have much to tell, other than to complain once more about losing my powers. We got to the place where we emerged from the Bohrok lair after fighting the Bahrag, and it was blocked with stone and earth. And we were helpless to do anything about it.”Toa Tahu grimaced. “But with a shared Pakari, couldn’t you just move the rocks? Even without earth and stone powers?”“Sure. We started to, but after a while, we saw how depressingly slow our progress was. And who knows how deep that rubble is? We decided it would be better to try to deprive the Kal of their krana instead. So I came to find you, to see how you were doing in your pursuit.”“Where are our water-sister and earth-brother?” asked Toa Lewa.Toa Pohatu looked up at him. “I ran Onua back to Onu-Koro to check in with his Turaga. And Gali went back to her region, too.”“Whose idea was it to give up?” asked Toa Tahu with great irritation.“Well,” said the Toa of Stone slowly, “I believe Gali was the one who spoke first, but all of us were thinking the same thing.”Toa Tahu kicked a rock. It ricocheted off Toa Lewa’s tree and landed in the campfire, raising a cloud of ash.Toa Lewa said, “Wait, Pohatu. The Kakama Nuva lets you fast-move through stone and earth now, right?”“Well, yes, but without an Akaku, we wouldn’t know what we would be running into. By the way, where’s Kopaka?”“Who knows?” muttered Toa Tahu. “Who cares?”“See, Tahu?” said Toa Lewa. “One more smart-reason to get the masks first.” Toa Tahu insisted we didn’t have that kind of time. But Toa Lewa said that as long as the Bohrok-Kal were looking for their krana, too, perhaps we did. And throwing ourselves uselessly at the Kal didn’t seem to be slowing them down any.Toa Tahu finally ordered, “Pohatu, take Lewa with you and go back to the cave opening. He has a Akaku now. After you see if the Bahrag are still there, come back and report to me. I’ll stay on the trail of the Kal that are headed for Ta-Wahi.”Toa Pohatu straightened up from his usual slouch and snapped his heels together. “Consider it done. Lewa?”Toa Lewa dropped out of the tree. “All right. But when we’re finished look-gazing at that dank-slime hole in the ground, you’d better zip-run me back to my jungle for some fresh air.”“Yeah. You resume the trail of the other Kal,” Toa Tahu suggested. “And use that new Akaku to keep an eye out for Kanohi.”Pohatu smiled. “You might want to check in with your Turaga sometime, Tahu, like the others are doing. For some reason those geezers always seem to have an idea where the masks are.”Toa Tahu crossed his arms and watched them vanish. He turned and kicked some dirt over the remains of the campfire. “Come on, you two. Let’s follow these tracks.”I offered to let Jala ride on Puku, but he politely refused. “I’m an infantryman, Takua,” he smiled. So I got on instead. It felt good to ride instead of walk, because my feet are weary from days of trekking. After his night watch, Jala he was so tired he began to stumble. Toa Tahu picked him up so he could catch up on his sleep.As we drove on after the Kal again, my mind wandered back to the day when Puku adopted me. The first time I saw her was during my travels in the time of the infected Rahi. The Onu-Koronan who runs the taxi crab stand saw me walking up to the entrance of the underground village, and he offered me a ride on a retired racing crab. I started to refuse, because Ussals have always seemed kind of scary to me. Sure, they’re tame, but those claws are pretty intimidating. Still, I looked down the long, dark tunnel, and I decided I’d prefer to have some company, even if it was of the eight-legged variety. So I climbed onto her smooth back, and off we went. The ride was very pleasant, and her gait even and regular. In no time we were at the village. I hopped off and patted her head right behind her eye stalks, and she leaned over and rubbed her face on me. Then I walked to the biggest hut, figuring I’d be most likely to find out what was going on in there. Later I wandered into the Ussal stable, and I met Onepu there. He was waxing a crab, and like any soldier, he was happy to tell me a little bit about his work. The crabs used to serve in mining transport, digging, and racing, but of late he had been training them to carry Onu-Koronans into battle. He had noticed me coming into the village, and he told me a little more about the crab I had been riding. “She was a real champ in her day,” he said with pride. I think he was the one who used to race on her.To make a long story short, the Turaga manipulated me into gathering a company of Matoran to defend the Kini-Nui while the Toa were underground fighting Makuta. No sooner had the Toa dropped into the temple, and the last cloud of dust settled from the moving stones, when a couple of infected Rahi showed up. We encircled the giant stone monument, which is so large we could only just see each other. First there was a Muaka and a Kane-Ra. Hafu was slinging disks so fast I could barely see them, but the creatures were batting them away and still approaching. It was obvious it would take more than one Matoran to defeat them. Maku moved around to help, and soon all of us were firing at them. Finally Kopeke knocked the last mask off the Kane-Ra, and there was peace… for about thirty seconds.This happened over and over again as more Rahi attacked. Kapura would relocate himself around the animals to confuse and surprise them. Hafu and Maku relied on sheer arm strength and deadly aim. Kopeke shot infrequently, but he never missed. Taipu—well, he just turned himself into a disk-spewing machine, sending out a cloud of them at high speed. Hardly any of them actually hit anything, but they made the beasts recoil in dread so someone else had a chance to make the critical shot. And Tamaru was doing crazy stuff, like hurling disks between his legs and turning flips. His weird fighting style mesmerized more than one Rahi long enough for Hafu to home in on the infected masks. I—yes, even I—got in a few lucky shots. At one point my disk hit one Muaka mask and bounced off onto the other, knocking it off as well. I couldn’t believe it!Well, we were holding our own for a while, but as everyone knows, Makuta got wind that his visitors had backup, and he sent a rampaging horde of enraged animals at us. Thundering Kane-Ra hoofs almost drowned out the hissing of the mighty Nui-Jaga as they skittered toward our company. Snarling Muaka crept closer as swarms of Nui-Rama darkened the sky. Tarakava, summoned from the distant sea and desert, rumbled toward us. We glanced at each other in terror. I wondered which was a more painful death, a Muaka bite or a Nui-Jaga sting. But we muttered some words of encouragement to each other and started flinging disks. Kapura teleported himself right into harm’s way to gather a bunch of disks we had already used, because Hafu is the only one who can reliably throw them so they return to him. Then, when he had an armful, that plucky red fellow did his relocation trick to bring them back to us.After several rounds, though, Maku was limping from a Tarakava’s blow to her leg, Kopeke was fishing for his mask in the tall grass, and Tamaru was clawing at the Nui-Jaga poison in his eyes. I had gotten scooped up by a Nui-Rama before Kapura shot it out of the sky, and my shoulders were clawed and bruised. Disks were running low, and hope was fading fast. But just as Hafu was using his axe to fend off a Kane-Ra that was ramming Taipu’s head, reinforcements arrived. Jala’s guard, Kongu’s Kahu Force, and Onepu’s Ussalry all sailed valiantly over the hills. Later Hafu joked that he wasn’t sure who had it worse, Taipu or the Kane-Ra.Say, I haven’t managed to keep this story very short, have I? Anyway, the combined armies of Mata Nui drove away the herd of crazed creatures, and we could breathe again. Then Onepu stepped forward with that same crab I had ridden in Onu-Koro. He told me she had insisted on coming along, even though she was retired from service. He said she liked me! I’m not sure how she had told him that, but she scuttled up to me and nuzzled me with her eye stalks, so I guess he was right. She gave me a ride down into the tunnels again, so I could see the end of the Toa’s battle with Makuta. She dropped me off at the elevators in the Great Mine. I was actually reluctant to part company with her and drop down into that mine shaft. She seemed to feel the same way.Now, I have no idea what goes through the primitive little brain of a creature like an Ussal crab. But whatever it is, it’s brought Puku in and out of my life over and over again. She made her way to Ta-Koro for the victory party after the Makuta battle, even though fireworks make her cover her eyes with her claws. When Turaga Vakama showed me that I actually had my own hut in the village of fire, which I had forgotten about, I added a room onto it for Puku. Whenever she’s around she stays there. She wanders off for days sometimes, but I know she’s all right, for she can take care of herself. But I’m always glad to see her again, because she always seems to show up when I need her most, and she also takes good care of me.After we had gotten back into Ta-Wahi, Toa Pohatu and Toa Lewa showed up again. Toa Tahu asked them what they had found, and they replied, “Nothing.” Apparently the rubble was so thick they couldn’t see all the way through it with the Akaku. They ran through the stone, sharing both masks, but they came to some sort of wall that even the Akaku couldn’t see through. After a few attempts to go around it, or find an opening, they started running out of air. Toa Lewa wanted to try to run through the wall anyway, but the Toa of Stone refused to use his Kanohi to put them in danger. He said if you couldn’t see through it with an Akaku, it was doubtful you could run through it with a Kakama anyway. So they turned around and came back.So, Toa Pohatu whisked Toa Lewa off to Le-Wahi again to follow the other set of tracks. Jala asked Toa Tahu if he wanted to stop by the village and see if Turaga Vakama could tell him about any mask locations, but Toa Tahu said maybe later. For the time being, he just wanted to keep following the Kal. So we did. We’ve stopped for the night on a high ridge. From here, we can see three of them moving across the hardened lava on the slope of the Mangai. I’m not sure what Toa Tahu has in mind, but whatever it is, he’s determined to see it through. It’s so warm here, with the magma flowing a few bios under our campsite, that we didn’t bother to light a fire. It’s my turn to watch for the night. I’m glad I have Puku to sit with me.Summer 1 : 17Puku nudged me awake this morning. I emerged from the fogginess of sleep and realized with a start that I was supposed to be on guard duty. Fortunately for all of us, Puku had been keeping watch in my place. I glanced around sheepishly, and everyone was safely asleep. Well, there’s something that definitely won’t make it to Turaga Vakama’s ears—or the Wall of History, either.As Puku returned from her morning foraging with a large centipede to gnaw on, I woke Jala and Toa Tahu, and we were soon on our way. The tracks split again. At first Toa Tahu was annoyed, but then it occurred to him that one-on-one, he had a better chance of prevailing against the Kal. We followed the middle set of footprints. It seemed like we might be trailing the Pahrak-Kal, because from time to time we saw a melted cliff edge, or a crevice burned into the volcanic rock, as if it were testing its powers along the way.Sure enough, we rounded a corner, and there was the Pahrak-Kal, in all its sinister bronze glory. Jala saw a group of Guardsmen trailing it at some distance, and he ran to see what they could tell us about its activities.Toa Tahu scrambled over a rocky outcrop to confront the creature. It seemed to be staring intently at something, and it completely ignored his taunts, which infuriated him all the more. He finally jumped into its path, his swords raised, and charged it.Well, the next part isn’t pretty to describe. The Pahrak-Kal melted the stone below Toa Tahu’s feet, then proceeded to blast his body with its fearsome elemental power. Toa Tahu didn’t seem to expect heat to hurt him, but evidently it did. He writhed in agony, too proud to cry out, but too wracked with pain even to get out of the way. I pulled my disk off my back and hurled it at the Kal. It flew into the plasma beam and vaporized instantly.Luckily, Jala startled the Pahrak-Kal with a yell, and it turned around. Toa Tahu collapsed to the ground. The members of the Guard unit arrayed themselves around the Kal, disks and spears ready, even though such weapons were clearly useless against such formidable power.The Kal seemed amused. “Is this your rescue party, Toa?” it said mockingly. “They’re a little on the puny side!” It ignored Jala’s retort and moved onto the next ridge.Jala ran to Toa Tahu’s side, entreating him to let the creature go before he got hurt again. Toa Tahu shook him off, determined to pursue it. “Better that than living as a coward,” he snapped.What happened next totally shocked me, because to Jala, Toa Tahu is more than just the protector of our village. He’s everything—role model, champion, and hero. I could hardly believe it when Jala shouted boldly, “You have no right!”That got Toa Tahu’s attention. He asked Jala to repeat what he had said, probably thinking the Matoran would back down. But Jala explained himself. And what he said was true. He said that Toa Tahu’s duty to Mata Nui meant that the Toa had no right to sacrifice himself for personal pride.The Kal stopped and turned to watch this conversation, throwing in a catty remark or two. But as Toa Tahu started to battle it with words, Jala jumped at the Kal with his knife and pried open its headplate. He grabbed the krana and held it up triumphantly. The Kal lurched and keeled over.Toa Tahu cheered, “Good job, brave Jala!” The guardsmen all gathered around to see the strange object. It was glittery dark gray in color, and it squirmed slightly in Jala’s grip. He handed it to Toa Tahu, who said, “Now that we’ve captured one of them, the others will—”The jubilation was cut short as one of the Ta-Koronans yelled and pointed. A Gahlok-Va was loading a new krana into the Pahrak-Kal. Everyone scattered like a flock of Gukko before a Muaka. The Kal jumped up and sprayed a ring of fire around itself, ensuring that no one would bother it as it made its leisurely way over the next hill.Toa Tahu groaned. “I can’t believe it! And after your act of bravery, Jala…”Jala was crestfallen. He folded his knife and put back in his pack.“Well,” I said, trying to be encouraging, “at least we learned not to trust the Va. And maybe Turaga Vakama can tell us something useful about that krana.”“You’re right, Takua,” sighed Toa Tahu. “Let’s go see Vakama.” We set off for the village.After a couple hours of hiking, the fortress in the middle of the lava river was a welcome sight. The guards saluted efficiently, but they were smiling, glad to see their heroes again. And they were happy to see me, too. I waved at Lito, keeping watch on the wall, and he waved back. He’s one of my surfing buddies. We went inside and headed straight for Turaga Vakama’s hut.The Turaga welcomed us warmly. He listened attentively to Toa Tahu’s account of Jala’s courageous attack on the Kal. Jala held up his head proudly as the village elder patted his shoulder. “Well done, Captain.”Then his eyes narrowed as he examined the krana-kal more closely. He turned it over, following its creases with his finger. “It’s a Bo, the visionary krana. It works a bit like an Akaku.” Then I understood why it had been staring at the rocks around it. Perhaps it had been looking for krana hidden in the many crevices and bubbles in the hardened magma.Then Turaga Vakama held it at arm’s length and changed to his Komau. The mask glowed slightly for a moment and stopped. Turaga Vakama changed back to his Huna and frowned. “Its will is very strong. It refuses to give up its secrets. But perhaps eventually we can learn something from it. And as you’ve pointed out, Toa Tahu, this incident has taught us not to trust the Va.” He started to summon a guardsman to tell the others about the change in policy, but Jala insisted on announcing the news himself.As Jala briefed the troops, Turaga Vakama put the krana inside a stone box, using his firestaff to seal the edges. He explained that even outside a Bohrok, the krana might still be able to hear and see and transmit telepathic messages to its brothers. Then Jala returned, and the three of us sat down and reviewed everything we had learned about the Kal. “If they can get new krana from the Va, why are they searching for them?” asked Toa Tahu.“Perhaps they can’t get them all from the Va. The Bahrag may have put a few extras in reserve for emergencies,” replied the Turaga. “The Pahrak-Kal may well have suffered a setback because of you. That krana you took probably contains the power of each of the krana it had collected, but the one brought by the Va holds only one power.”Jala perked up at this thought. “That’s good,” he smiled. “I’ve instructed the Guard to round up all the Va and confine them in a cave on the other side of the river.”“I’ll inform the other Turaga,” promised our village leader. “There are probably plenty of Va on the loose, though, so if you capture another krana-kal—”“You mean WHEN we capture another krana-kal,” interrupted Toa Tahu.“—when you capture another krana-kal,” grinned Turaga Vakama, “it might be a good idea to disassemble the Bohrok that was carrying it.” After a few more questions, he dismissed us for dinner.We spent the evening in comfort, for a change. A hot meal with friends, instead of dried meat on the trail. As soon as Lito and Raku got off guard duty, they came and sat next to me at the evening storytelling. Turaga Vakama was particularly inspired. He retold the story of how the Toa had arrived and turned the tide against the infected Rahi. I think he might have been trying to lift Toa Tahu’s spirits a little by recounting lots of his heroic exploits. At any rate, it’s a story I never tire of hearing, unlike his lectures about responsibility. I sat, envisioning the gritty, action-packed scenes he evoked with his calm voice, and daydreamed of the time when all you had to do to defeat an enemy was knock off its tainted mask.Finally, the fire died down to glowing embers, and the Turaga announced that the storytelling was over for the night. Puku settled happily into her cubby adjoining my hut. It was nice to lie down on my own bed again. Jala always teases me that as much as I like my bed, it’s amazing that I wander away from it so much. But I think it’s the time I spend sleeping on the ground that makes my bed feel so good. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

The Toa have split apart for the time being, and each is back home in his village. But they must still be thinking about each other, for in their dreams, they are still having adventures together. I called Onua to see what his imagination had conjured up in the night.Onua EmbarrassedGaliGee: Onua, I’ve been talking to a couple of the other Toa, and they report strange dreams lately. Has this been happening to you?Onua: Actually, GaliGee, now that you mention it… I had a really bizarre dream just this morning!GaliGee: This morning? Oh, yeah, you’re nocturnal. Would you mind telling us about it?Onua: No problem. It started out in Le-Koro. I was on my way to the hive to free Lewa from the infected mask.GaliGee: That must be a very intense memory for you.Onua: Definitely. So, in the dream, I approached the hive, dug my way in, and spotted Lewa. There he was, looming tall and evil in the infected Miru, just like he did in real life. It sent a shiver down my spine. But this time, when I started to fight him, I was jumped by a swarm of Nuhvok.GaliGee: Yikes! I remember what those are like.Onua [laughs]: And one of them launched its krana at me, and it knocked off my Pakari and stuck to my face! It was awful!GaliGee: I believe it!Onua: So then the Nuhvok lined up and started to tap dance.GaliGee: Oh, now it’s getting goofy.Onua: It was crazy, all right. Lewa said, “Let’s go see what it’s like to be evil! Who can we go pick on?”GaliGee: This is starting to sound familiar.Onua: I could see that it was just a wacky dream, so I went along with it. We headed for Ko-Wahi. We found Kopaka there, and harassed him a little. But it was strange. He wouldn’t fight back, so it wasn’t much fun. We dragged him out of the ground and set him on a rock, and when he regained consciousness we talked to him.GaliGee: When he regained consciousness? Sounds like you roughed him up pretty bad!Onua: Yeah, it was kind of scary. We got a little carried away. Good thing it was just a dream.GaliGee: I’ll say! What did you tell him?Onua: Well, we talked about how he and Tahu had gotten out of control pretending to fight in real life, and how senseless it is to hurt each other.GaliGee: Uh, huh.Onua: Then I wrestled with Lewa in the snow. And I finally pinned that weasel!GaliGee: There are weasels in Mata Nui?Onua: Yes, in Le-Wahi. But then suddenly we were falling, with big chunks of ice all around us. And then I woke up.GaliGee: That sounds like Kopaka’s dream. He’s lost his ice powers, and he had a really strange nightmare about it.Onua: Yeah, I really hope we can help him get his powers back soon. I read comic #9 while I ate breakfast today, and then I understood that part of my dream.GaliGee: Was there another part?Onua: Oh, yes. The fun part.GaliGee: What happened?Onua: Gali and Pohatu and I were playing. She started some water flowing, and we tried to dam it up. We ended up getting totally covered in mud.GaliGee: Gali told me a little about this adventure.Onua: Gali did? She had the same dream? Oh, no!GaliGee: You sound worried.Onua: Well, I think I acted like an cool dude.GaliGee: I doubt that! What happened?Onua: Well, after she washed us off, which felt really good, by the way, we built a lake. She went underwater with me and I used her Kaukau while I dug out the lake basin. And I looked at her underwater, and when she’s in her element she’s even more beautiful than on land.GaliGee: I see.Onua: Don’t let it go to your head, Little Sister.GaliGee [laughs]: I won’t. So, then what?Onua: Then we got out of the water, and Pohatu wasn’t paying attention, so we pushed him in.GaliGee: I bet he loved that!Onua: Oh, yeah. He ran out of the lake, jumped up and down to shake off the water, and started a big landslide. But he raced over and piled up a levee, and the rocks rolled against it. Then he got even with us.GaliGee: He sent you into the ground with his Kakama?Onua: Yep! Left us stuck right in the middle of a layer of sandy loam. Easy to dig out of, but it scared Gali. I dug over to her, and she looked really panicked.GaliGee: I bet she was relieved to see you. Or your eyes, anyway, I suppose it was pitch-black in there.Onua: Yeah. So at this point, you are probably reading my mind, GaliGee.GaliGee: I know you pretty well, Onua. There you were, in YOUR element, alone in the dark with Gali.Onua: I think I must have stared at her for a little too long, because she said, “Hello? Earth to Onua! Are you going to get us out of here?” So then I dug us out.GaliGee: Bet you had fun saving her.Onua: I love doing that! When we came out of the ground, Pohatu was laughing because we were all covered with dirt. But this time he used his Kakama to dodge Gali’s water jet. Then we all went up the hill, lay on our backs, and watched the clouds. I fell asleep.GaliGee: It sounds so sweet.Onua: Oh, it was sweet, all right. But then I woke up in a cave in Ta-Wahi.GaliGee: That’s a big change of scene.Onua: Yes. Tahu was standing over me. He was telling me I had to follow him. Wouldn’t say why, just threw a big chunk of basalt at my feet and insisted I get up. So I did, and I got on the rock and lava-surfed after him.GaliGee: What was that like?Onua: I know how to surf, but it was hard to keep up with Tahu. I was trying to be careful so I wouldn’t fall in. It’s not like surfing in the ocean!GaliGee: No doubt! One mistake, and you’re toast.Onua: So Tahu kept yelling at me to hurry up, and I started to get sloppy, and I almost lost it a couple of times. I shouted at him to slow down, but he ignored me.GaliGee: Is that what his leadership is like in real life?Onua: Sometimes, GaliGee. Usually he’s better about it than he was in this dream, though.GaliGee: Where did he take you?Onua: Down this ravine, towards the sea. I could hear him yelling something about looking for a new enemy. Jala’s scouts had reported sightings of a strange creature. As we got closer to the place where they had seen it, I felt unusual vibrations through the earth. I could tell the thing was on the surface a few dozen bios straight ahead. So I suggested that we go underground and try to surprise it, by coming up underneath it.GaliGee: Sounds sensible. Did he like that idea?Onua: No, he called out for me to keep going. So I yelled back that I would dig under and meet him there. And I did. I popped up out of the ground just in time to see the creature attack him from behind. It looked like a silver Bohrok, so I suppose it was a Kal. Gali was there, too, further down the hillside. We watched helplessly as the thing hit Tahu with a big blast of energy. And then I woke up again, back at home in Onu-Koro.GaliGee: You must have been underground when Gali knocked over the Kal -- and Tahu -- with a blast of water.Onua: So that’s why there was steam everywhere! Wow. What a weird dream.GaliGee: What do you think it means?Onua: Oh, the lessons were simple. I’m supposed to learn from Kopaka and Tahu’s negative example that we Toa need to stop being so headstrong. But I don’t know what the lake scene was for. Just to tell me that I’m a bumbling fool when I get too close to Gali, I guess. But I already knew that.GaliGee: You’ll get used to her someday, Onua.Onua: No way!GaliGee: I think maybe the whole thing was to show you how you need to get back together with the other Toa.Onua: You sound like Gali.GaliGee: Yeah, well, she’s right.Onua: Maybe. But I’ve been enjoying a little time to myself, and with my villagers. Whenua and I had a lot of catching up to do, too. When there’s a good reason for the Toa to get back together, we will. Of course, if Gali were to come visit me, I wouldn’t send her away…GaliGee: What about Kopaka?Onua: I hope I get a chance to help him. I could catch him, like I did Tahu when the Nui-Rama dropped him, or dig a slide to slow him down. We’ll see when the next comic comes out.GaliGee: Onua, I’m really glad you told us about your dream.Onua: Wait, are you going to put this on BZP?GaliGee: Yes, unless you don’t want me to.Onua: Well, it’s a little embarrassing… but, OK, go ahead. I can never say no to you blue water girls.GaliGee: Thanks, Onua.Onua: Sure, GaliGee. See ya! [click]So there’s Onua’s perspective on the strange Toa dream events. Now I’ve got three more phone calls to make. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

The Turaga have long played an important role in the affairs of Mata Nui, so I decided it was about time to have an interview with them. Well, strictly speaking, this is not an interview (sorry, I called it one out of habit). Nokama kindly arranged for me to listen to a meeting of the Turaga Council by speakerphone.Interview with All the TuragaGaliGee: Thank you for letting me listen in on your Turaga Council.Nokama: No problem, GaliGee. We’re just glad the BZ members still care enough about us to pay attention to one of our meetings. LEGO discontinued us, you know.GaliGee: Yes, I was really sorry to hear that. I ordered a whole set of you guys right away.Nokama: You did? How flattering.GaliGee: And then my 5-year-old built a Turaga MOC with two bodies and two heads. Yours and Matau’s.Nokama: Ugh. You didn’t have to tell me that.GaliGee: Sorry.Vakama [rapping his firestaff on a rock]: The Turaga Council will now come to order. Dang! My firestaff just went out. Onewa? Will you do me the honor of lighting it again, please?Onewa: Sure. I brought a couple of pieces of flint this time, on the hunch that this would happen again. [rubs flint together to light firestaff]Vakama: Thanks. Now, as I was saying –Whenua: Enough with the preamble! Let’s get on with it! I need to get back to Onu-Koro to supervise the flood cleanup.Vakama: If you would stop interrupting, we could move on. As I was saying, the meeting will now come to order. Nokama, will you please read the minutes of the last meeting?Nokama [rustling some papers]: Certainly. We last met a fortnight ago. You will recall that the Toa had gathered most of the krana in preparation for the final attack on the Bohrok to end the threat to Mata Nui once and for all. [clears her throat] Item 1. Validation of Prophecy. The prophesy of the Bohrok has come to pass, with swarms of creatures wielding six elemental powers seeking to destroy all life and landscape on Mata Nui. As was deciphered from the ancient writings, the Bohrok were controlled by living creatures called krana, which can be removed, rendering the Bohrok harmless. The Toa were informed of the need to collect one of each of the eight types of krana for each of the six breeds of Bohrok, and they will use these to unlock –Whenua: MUST we go over all this old news? My village is a giant mud slick right now. And my Ussal is double-parked.Vakama: Again? Then send someone to re-park it! And yes, we have to go through this again. It’s in the Council Charter.Whenua [muttering]: Charter, schmarter. OK, go on. Onepu? Will you please? [jingle of tossed keys] Thanks.Nokama: -- to unlock the ancient weapons hidden underground, which will enable them to defeat the swarms.Onewa: Well, THAT part didn’t happen, did it?Matau: From what Lewa said, those Exo suits were not very helpgiving. The Toa ended up taking them off.Nuju: [click] [whistle] [sneeze]Matoro: So the prophesy was accurate to a point. Bless you, sir.Nokama: In my opinion, the Exos helped for a while. But like you said, Matau, the Toa went back to using their elemental powers again. I think part of the reason for the Exos was just to encourage the Toa to take on the Bahrag without fear.Vakama: My Toa doesn’t need that kind of help. He’s fearless.Whenua: Oh, knock it off, Vakama. They were all terrified, if they had any brains at all.Onewa: I’m sure some heavy-duty hardware improved their attitude, anyway. Pohatu says he was able to throw a really immense rock with that claw arm thing.Nokama: Mind if I go on?Whenua: Please.Nokama: Item 2. Trash Problem. It was reported by Whenua that a large assortment of empty cans and paper trash is consistently being found at the entrance to the Onu-Le-Koro tunnel. Matau was requested to ensure that after all Le-Koronan party activity, appropriate measures be taken to clean up the area.Vakama: Whenua, has this problem been addressed?Whenua: I don’t care any more! My village is a mud hole! The Le-Koronans certainly aren’t any worse than the Bohrok.Matau [sarcastically]: Thanks.Onewa: Yeah, yeah. So the Le-Koronans are party animals. What else?Vakama: We have to address these items, so we can clear them from the agenda.Whenua: YES! The entrance to the tunnel looks great. Except for the big caved-in part that the Lehvak messed up. The Le-Koronans are off the hook, for now.Matau: Well, let’s sing a happysong of relief.Nokama: Item 3. Repair of the Ko-Wahi Cable Car. Nuju requested help from Whenua to repair the machinery, which was destroyed by the Kohrak.Vakama: Nuju?Nuju: [buzz] [click] [whistle] [beep]Matoro: Nuju says the cable car is in working order again, and thanks Whenua for sending his team of engineers.Whenua: Onepu, remind me to give Nuparu a raise when we get back, OK?Onepu: Yes, sir.Nokama: This concludes the minutes from the last meeting. A benediction was offered in the name of Mata Nui –Whenua: Yeah, yeah.Onewa: Hey! Don’t be disrespectful! We need all the help we can get, you know.Whenua: Sorry. I’m just grumpy because my village is a pit of quicksand right now. May Mata Nui accept my humble apology as well.Nokama: That’s better. And then the meeting was adjourned. Vakama?Vakama: Thanks, honey. Now, the agenda for this meeting -Onewa: Excuse me, but did you just call Nokama “honey”?Vakama: You got a problem with that?Whenua: Call her “red-hot love bunny” for all I care. Just GET ON WITH IT!Matau: Whenua, you need to deepbreathe and calm down.Whenua: I can’t help it! My village is a boggy swamp at the moment! I wanna go home!Nokama: There, there. It’ll be OK.Vakama: Item 1. The Victory of the Toa over the Bahrag. The Toa defeated the Bahrag by forming a protodermis cage with their elemental powers, and the Bahrag were buried in the ensuing tunnel collapse. And the Toa were immersed in liquid protodermis and transformed into beings of even greater power, the Toa Nuva.Onewa: Go, Toa!Nuju: [beep] [buzz] [whistle]Matoro: Nuju says the Toa rock.Matau: Hooray for the braveheart Toa!Vakama: Nokama, will you please note in the record that the Turaga expressed feelings of pride and joy in the Toa and their victory.Whenua: Oh, for crying out loud, isn’t that a little obvious? My village is a –Nokama: Look, Whenua, you’re not the only one whose village was damaged. Will you please relax? Maybe you need a vacation.Whenua: All right, sorry, I’ll shut up.Vakama: Item 2.Matau: My Toa can FLY now.Vakama: That’s great, Matau. But please don’t interrupt.Onewa: Well, mine has weapons on his hands AND his feet now.Vakama: Gentlemen?Onewa: Sorry.Vakama: Item 2. Cleanup of Mata Nui.Whenua: Finally. Something USEFUL.Vakama: Will you SHUT UP? [bangs firestaff on rock] Dang firestaff. Onewa, will you please? Thanks. OK, the cleanup. Each Turaga is responsible for his own Wahi, but whoever finishes first will help the one most in need. How does that sound?Nokama: Great.Nuju: [buzz] [beep] [click] [click]Matoro: Nuju says that sounds wise. And then we can all take a vacation.Onewa: Maybe we should take a vacation FIRST. Some of us could really use it.Vakama: Work first. Then vacation. Item 3. The Kanohi Nuva. It seems that the Toa’s golden masks were transformed in the protodermis. Now each only has one power, but it extends to everyone in the vicinity.Matau: Great! Lewa can take us all sunsoaring!Onewa: Yeah, and Pohatu can move through solid objects. I can’t wait to see what THAT will be like.Vakama: What if he stops while you are in the middle of a big rock?Onewa: He won’t leave us in the middle of a big rock! Pohatu is more careful than that.Whenua: And if he does, Onua can dig you out with his new saws.Onewa: He WON’T, all right?Nokama: I’m looking forward to a little spear fishing with Gali. She can go really deep now, too! Finally we’ll get to see those deep-dwelling glow-in-the-dark fish we catch a glimpse of every now and then.Vakama [laughs]: You and your fishing. Is that all you ever think about?Nokama: I WISH. I haven’t been fishing in months.Vakama: Item 4. New prophesy. I think Nuju and Nokama have been working on this one.Nokama: We have been reading the BZP thread about the interview with Greg Farshtey, may he and the other Great Beings bless us with a rich and peaceful destiny. [moment of respectful silence]Whenua: Peaceful? That would be nice.Nuju: [hum] [beep] [cluck]Matoro: Nuju says that is unlikely. There are two new enemies coming up for the Toa to face next year. As of this moment, we don’t know much about them. The first are sinister and intelligent, and they will attack the Toa immediately. The second are very fearsome and somehow connected with Makuta, and they will show up in the fall.Onewa: Did Nuju really say all that?Matoro: Yep.Nokama: There is some good news, too. The Bohrok, without their krana, are apparently capable of helping us to rebuild Mata Nui.Nuju: [click] [beep] [squeak] [whistle] [buzz]Matoro: Nuju says that they are very strong, and with their elemental powers, they will be able to accomplish much. If you wish, he will be in charge of the effort to tame and harness them, since Ko-Wahi was not as heavily damaged as many of the other villages.Vakama: That sounds good. OK with everyone?[The other Turaga murmur their accord.]Nokama: Great Being Farshtey also said that the Toa would have some disagreements, and that would put them in danger. It’s my opinion that we should encourage the Toa to get along with each other as much as possible.Matau: How are we going to do THAT?Nokama: You could start by telling your Toa to stop making passes at my Toa.Matau: Lewa does not make passes at Gali!Nokama: I’ve SEEN him, Matau.Matau: Gimme a break. He’s just being playful. Besides, she likes it. It makes her laughsing. Has she ever grumblegriped to you about him?Nokama: No, but…Matau: Well, there you go. We could all use a laughgrin around here once in a while.Nokama: Humph! It just isn’t dignified.Onewa: Nokama, you could use a vacation, too. You’ve been working so hard to keep your girls out of trouble.Nokama: Some help YOU are, Onewa! The Bohrok were bad enough, but now I have Huki and Hafu snooping around Ga-Koro. I can’t get any rest.Onewa: It’s not my fault my boys are so handsome.Nokama: Grrrrr.Vakama: Nokama, you really DO need a vacation. Forget what I said about work first. We’ve got almost two months until the next comic comes out. How would you like to come to Ta-Koro? The sunset is so beautiful from the big volcano.Nokama: Sounds nice, but isn’t Ta-Koro kind of… hot?Onewa: Come to Po-Koro instead, and see why your girls like it so much there! We have sculpture, and koli, and more!Nokama: Great, but isn’t Po-Koro rather… dry?Whenua: Come to cool, damp Onu-Koro, then, you’ll like it. I’ll dig you a swimming pool!Nokama: Thanks, but isn’t Onu-Koro sort of… dark?Matau: What you need is a tourtrip of our new Hoi sanctuary. You’d joysmile. And then we’ll have a highbranch concert for you.Nokama: How sweet. But Le-Koro is awfully… high up above the ground. I know! Let’s take a fishing trip!Onewa: You mean in that – little boat of yours?Nokama: Yeah! It’ll be great.Matau: Um, I think I’d better hardwork on getting Le-Koro cleaned up from the evildark Lehvak attack.Whenua: Yeah, Onu-Koro is really a slime pit right now. Gotta get back there and help dig it out.Onewa: Must fix the main gate. And get those statues back up.Vakama: So many blocked lava flows to open up.Nuju: [click] [whistle] [buzz]Matoro: Nuju invites you to go ice fishing in Ko-Wahi, Nokama. Kopaka found a frozen lake when he was trying out his new skates.Nokama: That sounds great! Let’s go as soon as the meeting is over.Onewa: Oh, man! Well, you’d better bring back some fish.Vakama: Yeah, if you’re not back by sundown, we’re coming after you.Nuju: [click] [beep] [whistle] [buzz] [click]Matoro: I can’t tell them THAT, sir! They’ll – um, will you please excuse us for a moment? [whispers to Nuju]Nuju: [beep] [cluck] [hum] [beep]Matoro [clears his throat]: OK, Nuju says that you are being very disrespectful of Nokama, and you should stop.Matau: Guys, we’re fearworried over nothing. Matoro is going to be there! What could happen?Onewa: Good point. Say, Whenua, I’d be happy to help you Onu-Koronans with the mud, and then you could send some guys to help us with our gate. I bet Taipu and Hafu could get those statues back up if they work together.Whenua: Sounds good, Onewa. And if the Tohunga can’t do it, Onua can! Come on over after the meeting.Vakama: Matau, we could spare a few soldiers for your cleanup, too. And they could help you de-brief all those Le-Koronans who got kranaed.Matau: Thanks, Vakama. That would be quite a friendfavor. We’ll come over and aidserve you however we can after that. And then you and I could watch the sunset on the big volcano.Vakama: Gaaaaah!Matau [laughs]: Just kidding, big guy.Vakama: I sure hope so. OK, we have one more thing to take care of here. Item 5. Medals. Onewa has suggested we award our Matoran heroes somehow. Like Takua. We’re so proud of him in Ta-Wahi.Matau: Is that why you bootkicked him out last year?Vakama: We didn’t kick him out! He left!Matau: Whatever.Nokama: How about a protodermis disc to put on the wall of their huts?Onewa: Sounds good. I’m also thinking Hafu and Nuparu should get one.Nuju: [click] [squeak] [buzz]Matoro: Nuju says that would be entirely appropriate.Vakama: Whenua, can you take care of it?Whenua: I’d be happy to. As soon as we dig out the blacksmith shop, we’ll make the discs.Vakama: Great. Then let’s adjourn. May the Great Beings shower you all with blessings.Nokama, Onewa, Matau, and Whenua: And you, also.Nuju: [click] [whistle]Matoro: Nuju says, and you also.Nuju: Come with me, Nokama, let’s go to Ga-Koro first to pick up your tackle box. Matoro, go on back to Ko-Koro, I’ll see you later.Vakama, Onewa, Matau, and Whenua: NOOOOOO!Nokama: What is the matter with you guys? We’re going FISHING! GaliGee, you trust me, at least, don’t you?GaliGee: Of course I do, Nokama. Have fun on your fishing trip! You all should get a little rest before the next enemies show up. I think you’ll need it. And thanks for letting me listen in.Nokama: Thanks, we will, and you’re welcome. Bye! [click]Knowing the Turaga, they won’t be relaxing for long. The cleanup of Mata Nui is underway, and their wise leadership will be needed again. Thanks to TheFormerlyBlindMan2, Kikua, and GregF for ideas. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

You can't imagine. :biggrin:When our younger kid was 5, her grandmother took her to the toy store, probably thinking she'd pick out a doll. Instead, she selected a Gahlok. After I helped her build it (and marveled at its clever engineering), I typed in the web address, and we found the MNOLG. Since she couldn't read, she asked me to help her play. We were hooked.Happy memories of playing with LEGO bricks flooded back, this time with an intriguing storyline and simple yet cool music and graphics to go along. My daughter actually learned to read from playing this game, months before she set foot in a school. I lurked on BZPower for a litte while to see if it was safe for her, and soon we were both posting comments, stories, pictures, MOCs, etc. Our other daughter joined in as well. And I rediscovered my long-dormant love of creative writing, thanks to the smart, funny, encouraging members of this site. Now I've written a full-length original novel, inspired by the stories that were inspired by LEGO and BZPower. (There's a link to my website in my signature, if you're curious.) I'm planning to publish it soon as an e-book, and if there's enough interest, set up print-on-demand so people can order paper copies.And it all started with the Mata Nui Online Game. Thanks, LEGO and Templar!

Summer 2 : 12Today started out great. I felt like I was on top of the world. All morning I carved with renewed enthusiasm. I wasn’t particularly efficient, but I was happy, humming a song to myself and thinking about Nixie. I'm no expert on these things, but I'm beginning to suspect she might actually like me. My mind kept wandering off to images of her peering into the crystal, her delicate hands moving confidently over the pages of calculations, and the soft, warm glow of her golden eyes as she turned to me to explain some astronomical phenomenon. I could almost hear the gentle melody of her voice in my head and smell her cool fragrance. I was so absorbed in my thoughts that I didn't even hear Jala and Puku come down the stairs. When I heard a chittering sound behind me, I must have jumped a bio in the air.“Puku has missed you,” Jala remarked. “She's been helping on a road construction crew since you've been down here. They just returned this morning, and she headed for your hut right away. When she saw you weren't there, you should have seen the sad look on her, um, face.”I looked up from caressing my pet and smiled at him. “Thanks for bringing her down here.” I was glad she had something useful to do while I was working on the wall, but I had missed her, too.With all the excitement at the big party, I forgot to mention the Ussal races in my journal. Puku participated just for fun, even though she's retired. Onepu himself rode her to a quite respectable fourth place finish in the ten-kio race against a dozen crabs who were in better condition. All that traveling had built up her stamina, even though she's not very fast anymore. She was exhausted but happy, having given it her very best effort. A lazy guy like me could learn some things from that crab, I'm afraid.Jala and I chatted for a while. He had some delicious melons that Turaga Matau had brought on a visit to our village elder. Jala sliced one open with a flourish, and the sweet aroma filled the musty cave with freshness. I congratulated him on finally finding something worthwhile to do with his knife, and he laughed.He told me Toa Tahu has been away a lot, “testing his powers against the great Mangai.” I get the impression that means he’s been stirring up the magma with his power of heat, and then surfing it. Besides doing lots of road work, the Matoran have been repairing the lava channels around the village, still damaged from the Bohrok. And they are enlarging the village considerably. Whenever I go ‘topside’ (as a Ga-Koronan would say), I see a lot of dust and palettes of stone blocks and tools and so forth. Jala said they’re making a really huge new koli stadium, too. That’s something we’ve needed for a long time, in my opinion. I’m no koli star, but even I can tell the pitiful little stone basin we’ve been playing in prepares us poorly for the tournaments, which are usually held on the bigger, nicer Po-Koro field. Naturally, there’s a rumor that the Po-Koronans are building a really magnificent facility now.Jala and Puku went back to work, and so did I. Unfortunately, my energy started to flag by early afternoon, since I was up so late last night. My eyes were getting bleary, and my hands, which have grown used to the work by now, just felt tired. But the hardest part was trying to focus on what I was doing. I carved half a sentence before I realized that I had carved ‘Nixie’ instead of ‘Gali.’ I had to go back and chip off a layer of stone and do the name over. Since Toa Gali's name is shorter, I had to space out the letters, and it ended up looking kind of sloppy. Good thing it wasn't ‘Pohatu’ I had messed up.Well, about this time Raku and Lito showed up with my newly extended lava board. Lito had been sleeping all morning, of course, since he was on watch duty last night. “How can you stay awake, Takua?” he mused, shaking his head.I looked longingly at my board as they went on about the fresh, extra-hot magma flows that have been welling up out of the Mangai lately. Finally the temptation became too great. “I'm not getting anything done today, anyway,” I rationalized. So, after checking to make sure Turaga Vakama wasn't watching, I followed them out of the village and up the jagged slopes of the volcano.They hadn't been kidding about the enhanced flows. The lava was running hotter and faster than ever, and it was certainly much more intense than last night. “I think Toa Tahu has been getting a little crazy today,” Raku opined.Oh, the exhilaration of sailing freely over the glowing waves! It felt so good after being cooped up in a cave for days. The change in the board was really noticeable, too. I felt like I was flying! We surfed for a couple hours, then went to watch Toa Tahu do the big falls a few times. With the increased volumes of magma, his moves were even more spectacular than usual. He was plunging THROUGH the lava stream, which I’ve never seen before. Raku and Lito told me they saw him fall all the way into the lava once, before he went Nuva. He yelled pretty loud when it happened. The magma hardened into a stone casing on him, but he used his powers to burst out. They said it was really amazing to watch. Now he’s even more resistant to heat, so I guess that’s what allows him to briefly pass through it.We went back to surfing ourselves. Then disaster struck. Inspired by watching Toa Tahu, and riding high on lack of sleep, thoughts of Nixie, and the thrill of catching air on my new board, I got careless. I took a really big wave I had no business messing with, and I started to fall. I caught my balance at the last second, but not before I dragged my right arm through the lava from the elbow down.Well, Raku and Lito immediately came to my aid. They hauled my board, with me on it, back to shore. I writhed in agony for a while, and they tried to comfort me as best they could. We slipped back into the village just before the bridge went down, and I dragged myself up to my hut. Lito brought me some water and some fruit which he pilfered from Turaga Vakama’s hut. I felt better just knowing my friends care about me, but I can’t begin to describe the amount of burning in my arm.I tried to go to sleep, but the pain is overwhelming. So here I sit writing. The distraction helps a little. I can still write, even though my letters are obviously sloppier with my left hand. But carving takes two hands. It’s going to be difficult tomorrow, if not impossible.Oh, how I am regretting what I did... it’s bad enough that I took the afternoon off to play, but I then I went and did something really dangerous. Could anyone be more stupid?Summer 2 : 13Well, predictably, today was a day of misery. I woke up from a fitful sleep and immediately remembered what had happened yesterday. It was pretty hard to miss the throbbing pain.So, I stumbled down to the Wall and tried to chisel a few letters. Needless to say, it was pure agony. I tried simply clenching my jaw and ignoring the pain, and that worked for about ten seconds. Then I made an attempt to use my foot to hold the staff while I hammered with my left hand. All I did was scratch up the wall. Finally, I gave up. I’m just going to have to wait. But I can’t go up to the village, or everyone will start asking me about what happened, and Turaga Vakama will find out. So I read a bit more of the Wall, flipped through my journal to decide what to transcribe as soon as I can stand to carve again, and generally moped around feeling sorry for myself.Lito and Raku came down shortly after I got there. They had gone to the sea and brought back a bucket of water for me to stick my hand in. That helped some.Then Jala showed up. This was really awkward, because even though he’s my best friend, he’s still the Captain of the Guard and Turaga Vakama’s right hand Matoran, and I knew he would get on my case about being irresponsible. I tried to act like nothing was wrong and hid my hand behind my back. But it didn’t take long for him to notice that I was being really nervous. And he asked me what the bucket was for. Finally, I confessed to him what I had done and begged him not to tell the Turaga.“Oh, man, that’s awful!” he said sympathetically. “How can I help you feel better? Is there anything I can get you?” I wasn’t expecting this reaction, and I was really touched. Of course, eventually he got around to chiding me for running off and surfing when I had this big project I was supposed to do. But he was very gentle about it.“I know,” I admitted. “It’s just about the stupidest thing I’ve ever done.”“Do you want some help down here?” he asked.“No, thanks, that’s all right. I’ll get caught up as soon as it gets better.”Jala scratched his head. “You know, the Toa can combine their powers and do some very powerful healing. I’ll get Turaga Vakama to summon them, and—”“No! Definitely not. Then everyone will know what a goof-off I am.”“Takua, they already know,” he grinned. “We just put up with you because you’re such a great guy.”I groaned and sat down. “I’m the most worthless Matoran ever, Jala. All I’ve ever done is wander in circles and blunder into situations where someone needed help, and even a moron could do it. I feel guilty that others seem to think I’m something special.”“Oh, you’re definitely special,” Jala nodded. “No one else has that funny way of looking at things, seeing through the surface, and zeroing in on the truth. And you can write. I don’t think you realize how much better the Turaga’s stories have gotten since you’ve been the Chronicler.”I looked up, surprised. Jala was gazing into the distance. “You’ve taught me a lot, Takua,” he went on. “I used to think the secret to a happy life was following your duty to the utmost, making sure everything was prepared in advance and every detail was perfect. Now I’ve learned that the imperfections are what make things interesting, and how you react to the unexpected is just as important as making good plans in the first place.”Well, this just floored me. I’ve often wondered what Jala gets out of our friendship, and he had just given me the nicest answer. I all but forgot about my seared hand for a little while. “Thanks, Jala,” I smiled weakly. He patted me on the back and promised to return as soon as he had finished his noon rounds. Then he climbed the steps, and I was alone with my pain again.I remembered a story I heard from Turaga Vakama once about how Toa Tahu and Toa Kopaka had healed Toa Gali when she was injured by Lehvak acid. They had used water to do it, in conjunction with fire and ice. I daydreamed about Nixie walking in with a cup of cool water and pouring it over my hand, soothing me with words and caresses. But when she finds out what a miserably inadequate job I’m doing on something so important to the whole island, she’s going to change her mind about me, I just know it. She’s so devoted to her duty. She’s wasting her time with a misfit like me.Anyway, later this afternoon, Kapura popped into the cave with a big block of ice. Now, everyone knows Kapura is the oddest resident of Ta-Koro. He’s even stranger than I am. He’s really talented, though, because he can teleport himself from one place to another without walking. That’s how he managed to get ice into Ta-Koro, because if anyone else had tried to carry it here, it would have melted on the way. Well, maybe a Le-Koronan on birdback could do it.Kapura chipped a hole in the block, and I stuck my hand in it. The relief was almost instantaneous. Then my hand started to get too cold, and that hurt, too. So I let it warm up a bit and put it back in. With this method I was able to keep the pain at bay.I asked him how he knew about my accident, and he said Jala had told him. In fact, it was Jala’s idea for him to get me some ice. Jala had even asked Kapura not to tell anyone else. It’s easy for him to sneak in and out of the village, so that’s what he did.I’d heard he learned to translate after a particularly terrible lava surfing accident made him give up the sport altogether. I asked him about it, and he told me the whole story. It was even worse than my mishap. They had to get Turaga Nokama to come over and use her water powers on him.Well, after I thanked him, he vanished again. And later, Jala came back as he had promised, with some smoked meat and Bula berry juice. Raku and Lito checked in with me again in the evening, too. I feel really lucky that my friends are helping to make this torture pass more quickly.In between sessions with the ice block, I managed to carve about half an entry today. Out of my ten days to carve, I’ve used up six already. And I’ve gotten eleven entries completed out of the twenty-three I have to do. So I’m less than halfway done, and I’ve used up more than half the time. I’m going to have to work really hard once I can carve again. But I can still get it done. Especially with the encouragement of my wonderful friends.Summer 2 : 14My hand is better now. I have to carve really slowly today and take a lot of breaks, but I kept at it, and I think I might just make my deadline after all. So many kind friends came to cheer me up yesterday, and I’m determined not to let everyone down.Jala was the first to check on me today, and he brought me a mid-morning snack of fresh fish. It was left over from yesterday, when Turaga Nokama came to visit our village with an enormous Ruki that Hahli had caught. Jala beamed with pride as he retold the story. Hahli’s real job is making flax, but she goes fishing every chance she gets, and she was really excited to catch something this huge. Evidently this fish had given her a wild ride in her boat for about twenty kios before it tired out enough for her to her reel it in and haul it back to the village. He said it took three Ta-Koronans to carry it from Turaga Nokama’s boat to the main kitchen. While it was roasting, the two Turaga sat in his hut talking quietly and consulting the sacred fire. Then he gave her a tour of all the new construction. The villagers ate the meal that the cooks had already planned before she arrived, but the Turaga waited another hour for the Ruki to be done and ate that instead. (I’ve stayed down at the Wall during meals for the last two days because I’ve been too worried about being found out, so that’s why I didn’t know about this.) After dinner, Turaga Vakama walked Turaga Nokama back to the beach. When he returned, he was very solemn and thoughtful.Jala thinks they were discussing prophecies, but I told him the big fish was probably just an excuse for a long social call. At least, I hope so. Except for the coming of the Toa, prophecies have always foretold something really bad. After Jala left, it occurred to me that the Turaga never even tell us about them until they have already come to pass. I started wondering what else they haven’t yet revealed to us, but I put aside those thoughts so I wouldn’t demoralize myself. I’ve resolved to enjoy this time of peace, however long we’re blessed with it. Well, after my hand stops hurting and I’ve finished this dull task, I’m going to enjoy it.Then Kapura came down and offered to get me more ice. I thanked him and said I was all right. He stood and read the wall for quite some time while I carved. Finally he turned to me and said, “History moves in circles, and circles within circles, and every circle inscribes a triangle. Three virtues in our lives, three moons in a season, three Toa in a Kaita. I think our heroes will go underground a third time to confront an enemy before we are truly at peace on Mata Nui.”I looked at him quizzically. He always says weird philosophical stuff like that, but this time it worried me, because of the visit from the water Turaga. “Has Turaga Vakama been telling you things the rest of us don’t know?” I asked.“No, it’s just a hunch. I could be wrong. Well, I’m glad you’re better. I’ve got to go check on the stadium construction now. Oh, yeah—three teams in a koli match, and they play until one team gets three points.” He nodded and disappeared, leaving me to scratch my head.I went up to the village for the midday meal today, since I figured my hand looks normal enough now, and I’m tired of living on the snacks in my hut. Of course it was fish! I brushed off a lot of questions about why I’d been absent, explaining that I’ve been really busy working on the wall. Raku and Lito looked down at their plates.After I went back to work, my two surfer buddies showed up with some interesting bits of glass they had found while riding the waves. When the Kohrak disrupted the lava flows, some of it was diverted to the beach. The heat melted the sand, and the cool water hardened it into glassy lumps. We held them up to a lightstone and admired the way the image was twisted and distorted. In one of them you could even see a rainbow-colored halo around the lightstone. It was a welcome distraction for someone who loves the play of light on things.By the end of this evening, I finished carving one more entry on the wall. Now I’ve got three days to get the rest done. Oh, great, another three! Well, I know what I have to do, and that’s rest and heal for the big effort that is to come. Good night.Summer 2 : 15I carved furiously all morning. By noon my arms were aching more from the work than from my injury. But I looked at how much I’d completed, and how much was left, and I got pretty discouraged.Then I got the visit I’d been dreading. When I heard Turaga Vakama’s shuffling footsteps coming down the stairs, my body stiffened with apprehension. But it didn’t go at all as I expected. For one thing, he didn’t even yell at me. He just casually asked me how everything was going. I swallowed and replied, “Fine.” When he kept looking at me expectantly, I stammered about how many entries and days were left, adding a promise to speed up and finish by the deadline. But it was obvious I didn’t believe my own words.He waited for me to finish my pathetic little speech, and then he sighed. In a benevolent tone he began to reminisce about a time when he himself had been asked to complete a difficult task in a short time. “I understand your worry about something that seems impossible, especially with the pressure of everyone depending on you,” he said sympathetically. “You must put aside your feelings of inadequacy and reach inside yourself.”“What was this task? And who was it that asked you to complete it?” I wondered.“That’s not important right now, curious one,” he smiled enigmatically. “What matters is that when you let go of your anxiety, you can see new solutions to old problems.”I blinked a couple of times. “Yes, sir.” At this point I couldn’t see much past the reach of my arms, because I was so bleary-eyed from chiseling. But he’s wise, so I’m sure he’s right.“Oh, by the way,” he added, “be sure to omit any mention of Makuta’s presence.” I nodded vigorously, glad he had reminded me. I was getting close to that part, and it would have been heartbreaking to have to chip it all off again. Or worse yet, demoralize everyone and make the Turaga mad.He patted my shoulder and tottered away, and I went back to work. My friends came by as usual. But I’m in a hurry now. They could sense my urgency and didn’t stay long.Too tired to write more… did three entries today, got two more days to do eight more. Yikes! Gotta sleep now.Summer 2 : 16Today it was just chip, chip, chip. I forgot about the fact that the last few entries are so long, because so much happened as the Toa Nuva got closer to catching the Bohrok-Kal. I finished three and a half of them, and I wanted to keep working, but my hands are numb from the effort. It’s probably obvious from how bad my handwriting is. Must... sleep...Summer 2 : 17Jala is the nicest friend ever.Perhaps I should explain that remark, even though my hands are throbbing, and tell about how I finally finished the Wall on time. Or rather, how WE finished the Wall on time. Because of course it was thanks to Jala.He came down after lunch to bring me some food, since I had skipped the meal to keep working, in my desperation to get four and a half long entries done in one day. He offered to help, and at first I politely refused, because I didn’t see how we could work together without overlapping each other or creating a gap in the text. At this point I had pretty much abandoned my pride about Jala seeing my Nixie comments, especially since he already knows I’m a fool for her, but I was still concerned about editing. There are some personal reflections and so on in the book that didn’t really need to be on the wall, and I was paraphrasing some of the excessively wordy stuff as I went, too. So I kept working alone. But he stayed down there, just to encourage me, I guess.Raku and Lito brought me some dinner, and they were surprised to see Jala there. They went back and retrieved some food for him, too, and then they left.I took a break and ate with Jala. It was nice to have someone to talk to, and I was glad he was there. His sense of humor was helping me banish panicky thoughts and relax a little in spite of my predicament. And then, as I was cursing the benighted individual who had invented the alphabet with its pesky circles (which, as anyone who has carved stone knows, are the hardest shape to get right), the solution hit me.I asked Jala to carve the circles for me after I did the central part of each letter. Eagerly he went to fetch some more tools. I carved the lines and dots in the middle of the characters, and he chiseled a circle around each one. (Of course I had to carve the O’s, because all they are is a circle.) It worked great! His work was neat and methodical, like everything he does, and I got to the end way ahead of him, because I had the easier job. So I worked backwards, carving circles until we met in the middle of the last entry. We clanked our tired fists together in triumph. The Wall was done!Puku had come down to watch, because she had sensed something important was happening. She jumped up and down and chittered for joy. I was grateful for her presence, because I was almost too tired to walk. After we swept up the last of the rock chips and packed our tools onto her back, she carried me up the steps, with Jala shuffling wearily behind us. It was the middle of the night, and everyone else had long since gone to sleep. We broke into the kitchen storeroom and had a celebratory snack together, and then we all stumbled off to bed.So, I’ve got maybe an hour to sleep before I have to get up again, but I’m so relieved the Wall is done that I don’t even mind. I just hope I can stay awake tomorrow while they read the thing. With my luck, I’ll nod off right as Turaga Vakama calls on me to stand up or something.I can’t believe it’s done! I owe Jala a big one. I would never have finished without him. I guess Nixie won’t be embarrassed to know me, after all. I’ll see her tomorrow... If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Summer 1 : 11This morning we gathered our courage and headed into those awful tunnels. Toa Onua led the way, with Toa Kopaka right behind him, sharing his Akaku. Jala and I were next to last, with Toa Pohatu following us in case something attacked from behind.Well, I can’t even begin to describe how strange it is to see with an Akaku. At first I was really confused by all the weird colors and abundance of information. The other Toa were used to using an Akaku, but not an Akaku Nuva, so they asked Toa Kopaka some questions as we started out, and after he answered, I began to figure out what we were seeing. There were numerical readouts all around, showing things like range and temperature and density. We were actually looking through the earth, so we could see the tunnels ahead in spite of bends, rocks, and so on. The depth adjustment was up to Toa Kopaka, and Toa Tahu kept telling him what to focus on. But Toa Onua asked Toa Tahu to hush so he could listen for the sounds coming through the earth.The Akaku was so sensitive to variations of density that we could see the Bohrok-Kal’s footprints on the floor of the tunnel, even though the earth was packed down pretty hard. It was obvious there were a lot of them, probably all six. Every now and then Toa Kopaka would gesture at the wall where a Kal had scraped against it and left a mark. At one point we began to see a brightly colored ring-shaped object way up ahead. As we approached, we discovered that it was a huge boulder with a big hole melted through it. Evidently the Kal had made a shortcut for themselves. The stone was still warm to the touch as we passed through it.I had no idea what was driving the Kal to take this particular path, and I don’t think the Toa did, either. Now that they had all the Toa’s symbols, we didn’t know what their goal was, aside from collecting krana. We just followed the tracks. There was a hole chipped out of the side of the tunnel in one place. Maybe they had found a krana there.Then we heard a strange sound up ahead. It was high- and low-pitched at the same time. The earth rumbled under our feet, and our ears rang with the intense whine. Then there was an explosion, and it stopped. Toa Onua motioned for us to hurry. A few minutes later, the Akaku revealed that the Kal had blasted open a path to the surface. Rubble had partially caved it in again, but we scrambled through it up to daylight. I was grateful to be out of those ghastly underground passageways, even though I was pretty scared of what lay ahead.We stood there, blinking in the bright light, until Toa Kopaka found the tracks in the dirt. Quickly, we resumed the trail. Toa Onua offered to carry me on his shoulders, and I was happy to accept. Toa Pohatu noticed us and gave Jala a ride, too. We were tired, dusty, and frightened, and it was nice to take care of at least one of those problems.The Toa were talking about the theft of the symbols and how they were probably tied to their loss of powers. Toa Gali asked what they would do if we found the Kal, and Toa Tahu answered that it was not a matter of ‘if’ but ‘when’ and assured her they would get their powers back. We crested a ridge, and Toa Pohatu said, “Uh, Tahu? I think those things up ahead might have something to say about it.” Toa Kopaka had apparently already seen them, because he put his hand on Toa Onua’s arm to stop him.Toa Pohatu undoubtedly meant ‘say’ in the figurative sense, I’m sure, because everyone was surprised when the Kal turned around and called to us across the expanse of desert. “We are the Bohrok-Kal. We search for Cahdok and Gahdok, queens of the swarms,” said the Nuhvok-Kal. Its voice was cold and metallic, without inflection or emotion.Toa Onua and Toa Pohatu put Jala and me down and motioned for us to retreat behind the ridge. We complied right away, peeking over a rock to see what was happening.The Pahrak-Kal continued. “Tell us where you have hidden the Bahrag, and then stand aside. We have no wish to harm helpless foes.”Jala and I looked at each other. So that’s what they were after! They were actually getting closer when they were in the tunnels, but perhaps their quest for krana had distracted them.Well, Toa Lewa’s never one to stand aside when challenged. He sprang forward, rapidly closing the gap between him and the Kal, with the other Toa running behind him. Toa Lewa yelled, “Helpless? Toa Nuva are never helpless! We’ll run you into the ground!” He swung his katana at the Gahlok-Kal’s head plate to knock out its krana, but it backed up and raised its hand shields, and suddenly his feet stuck to the ground.“No amount of speed can save you from my magnetic force,” retorted the Gahlok-Kal. Toa Lewa struggled to lift his feet, but he couldn’t move. Now, I would never have thought that was possible, except for something that Taipu once told me about protodermis. He said there was protodermis in everything, even the rocks and dirt. It just wasn’t in a form that was useful to anyone, so that’s why they had to mine deep in the earth for big veins of it, in purer form. Taipu’s really smart sometimes for such a simple guy. So, if the Gahlok-Kal can magnetically hold a creature to the dirt, it must have great power indeed.Meanwhile, Toa Onua was not going to let his friend take the brunt of the attack alone. He lifted an immense boulder over his head. “The Toa Nuva do not seek conflict. But if we must battle, I shall end it quickly!” Just as he prepared to hurl it at the Kal, the Pahrak-Kal hit it with a plasma blast. The rock melted and vaporized instantly. That’s right, I said vaporized. I’ve seen Toa Tahu melt rock before, but it’s always turned into liquid. I’ve never seen anything turn stone into a gas. Needless to say, Toa Onua dove out from under the boiling mass and rolled away, clutching his hands to his chest. Toa Gali glanced at him sadly. I’m sure she wished she could take away the burn with her cool, soothing waters.Toa Tahu immediately activated his Hau Nuva. If the Toa couldn’t effectively attack the Kal, at least he could provide defense. Then he tried to reason with the creatures. “Bohrok-Kal, your quest must fail. The creatures you seek have vanished from Mata Nui.”As far as we knew, that was true. Bound in their protodermis prison, the Bahrag had been crushed by hundreds of bios of solid rock when their lair collapsed. Everyone figured they were probably shards of flattened metal at this point.But the Kal were not easily dissuaded. “You lie!” said the Nuhvok-Kal, the higher pitch of its voice showing anger. “They are here, and we will find them.” Then it calmed down again as it raised its hand shields. “Your shield cannot stand before the crushing power of gravity, Tahu Nuva.”Instantly, Toa Tahu was thrown face first to the ground, hitting the earth with a sickening thud. Toa Gali cried, “Tahu!” and Toa Onua warned everyone to defend themselves. The Kal, in their metallic monotones, informed the Toa of the futility of self-defense. Jala and I ducked behind the rock as we heard the incredible clamor of their combined blasts. There were howling, roaring, exploding, and crashing sounds. When the noise stopped, we peeked over the boulder to see what was left of our heroes.The Kal were trotting away over the next ridge. As they disappeared from sight, we ran to the Toa. They were strewn about like branches after a hurricane. The ground was covered with craters, gouges, and, scorch marks. Jala crouched down next to Toa Tahu and listened for a heartbeat. “He’s alive!” he cried. “Check the others!”We went from one Toa to another, and all of them were breathing. He turned Toa Tahu’s head a little so his mask wasn’t stuck in the dirt anymore, and I moved Toa Kopaka’s ice blade, which was poking Toa Gali in the ribs. Jala and I hugged each other with relief. “But will they be all right?” I wondered.“They have to be,” said Jala quickly. “The great Mata Nui couldn’t have allowed our heroes to be destroyed, all at once, to leave us defenseless.”I wasn’t so sure about that. Mata Nui was asleep, after all. But I didn’t want to crush Jala’s shred of optimism. I could tell if he didn’t have that, he would be overwhelmed by despair. I was on the verge of it, myself.I looked at the Toa, with their gray Kanohi and their powerless weapons, clutched in their insensible hands. This was the worst I had ever felt. Even when I watched the Toa being battered by Makuta, when he turned into that horrible thing with all the tentacles, I didn’t feel this bad. At least they were conscious then.Jala and I sat down together to wait, since it seemed like there was nothing we could do for them. “Do you suppose the Bahrag really are still alive?” I finally asked, breaking the gloomy silence.Jala shook his head. “I have no idea. It sounded like they were smashed, but you never know. That protodermis prison that kept them from killing the Toa may also have protected them when the lair collapsed.”That idea had never occurred to me, but it made sense. “What an ironic twist that would be, if it’s true,” I remarked.“Yeah. You know, this reminds me of when I kept watch over the Toa after they defeated Makuta. They were all sleeping in the field next to the Kini-Nui. But that time, they were resting peacefully after winning the fight. This time…” He stopped, his voice tight with emotion.We sat quietly for a while. Then Jala got up and checked on the Toa again. He shook Toa Tahu gently, but there was no response. Then he came and sat with me again.“Hey, Jala, how about a game of Juma-Juvo?” I asked.Jala gave me a funny look, but then he shrugged. “Why not?”I took a rock and scratched out a grid in the dirt. Jala gathered some stones and set them on the ‘board.’ “I’ll be the dark stones, and you can be the light ones,” he suggested.I made the first move. I expected Jala to beat me, because he’s the king of strategy. He had just cornered my last few pieces when we heard someone stirring. We jumped up.Toa Lewa was the first to sit up. “Ohhh… what happened?” he moaned.Toa Onua raised his mask off the ground. “I believe we have just been given a warning by the Bohrok-Kal.” We ran joyfully over to the two Toa and helped them up.Toa Tahu rolled over onto his back and closed his eyes again. Toa Gali sat up, rubbed the back of her head as she looked around, then crawled over to him and helped him sit up.“They obviously do not want us interfering with their search,” said Toa Onua.“No? Well, the Bohrok-Kal will pay for daring to challenge the Toa Nuva,” growled Toa Tahu.Toa Kopaka staggered to his feet. Toa Onua was helping Toa Pohatu to stand, and he was leaning heavily on his strong friend. “We shall--” Toa Tahu began.But Toa Gali interrupted. “Tahu! This is no time to worry about our pride! Didn’t you hear them? If they find Cahdok and Gahdok and free them… the Bohrok swarms will strike again!”After some talk wavering between pessimism and defiance, Toa Tahu announced the plan. “Gali, you, Pohatu, and Onua go back to the Bohrok nest, and see if you can discover what happened to Cahdok and Gahdok. Kopaka, Lewa, and I will keep after the Bohrok-Kal, and see if we can slow them down.”“Great,” muttered Toa Lewa. “I get the team with personality.” Toa Kopaka told him to be quiet.Jala looked at me and then at Toa Tahu. Obviously, we would stay with him. I was a little disappointed, because I would have liked to see the inside of the Bahrag lair. What was it like in there, I wondered? Someone needed to describe it on the Wall of History. And two of their party had Kakama, too. We were stuck doing the same old thing, accompanying three Toa who were following these creatures who could easily crush all six Toa. But I didn’t say anything. Everyone was in a bad enough mood as it was.We set off after the tracks again. We walked until we were weary, always a little ways behind the Kal. They led us across the desert and into the river valley, where we finally camped for the night. While we ate, Toa Tahu took a stick and poked at the coals in the campfire. Toa Kopaka sat far from the fire, by himself, and studied his ice blades. Toa Lewa looked off into the distance, watching the birds and humming a tune until Toa Tahu told him to shut up. Finally, they all went to sleep. Jala is keeping watch, and now that I’m finished writing, I’m going to get some rest, too.Summer 1 : 13The Team with Personality trudged wordlessly after the Bohrok-Kal all morning. I’m not sure why Toa Tahu chose up the groups the way he did. Maybe it’s because he, Toa Kopaka, and Toa Lewa are the most aggressive fighters. It’s not like Toa Pohatu and Toa Onua will actually have much of an advantage looking underground for the Bahrag anymore, without their elemental powers. He probably wanted Toa Gali to be on whatever team he wasn’t, because she was apparently still mad at him.The Kal led us along the river for a while, heading east toward Ga-Wahi. We stopped to rest around noon on a shady hillside by the river. Toa Lewa sat in a tree where he could watch for the distant Kal and still participate in the conversation. “I don’t get it,” he said. “They’re wander-walking away from the Kini-Nui. Shouldn’t they be going toward it?”“No telling what kind of nonsense is going through those parasitic brains,” muttered Toa Tahu. “What does it matter? It just gives the other Toa a better chance to find the Bahrag before they do.”Toa Kopaka disagreed. “It does matter, Tahu. The more we know about them and their mission, the better we can thwart them. I’m guessing they’re looking for krana again.”“Why would they care about krana when they already overpower us so easily?” asked Toa Tahu, irritation in his voice. “That can’t be it.”“Maybe these krana are some kind of power-key they need to free the Bahrag,” speculated Toa Lewa.Toa Tahu suggested Toa Lewa ask them telepathically. Toa Lewa just crossed his arms and looked away. Toa Kopaka said, “Since we’re worthless at fighting them, we have to outsmart them. Collect the krana before they can. And pick up some masks along the way.”Toa Tahu insisted we keep trying to fight the Kal every chance we got. Toa Kopaka argued that attacking directly would be pointless suicide. The discussion degenerated to the point where Toa Tahu was questioning Toa Kopaka’s courage, and Toa Kopaka was questioning Toa Tahu’s sanity. Finally Toa Lewa said, “We can’t do either one from five hundred bios away. We need to hurry-catch them.” He dropped out of the tree and put one hand on each of the other Toa’s shoulders. “Come on, brothers. If we follow-trail them really closely, we can look-watch for good chances to sneak-attack. And maybe we’ll stumble-trip over a krana or a Kanohi along the way.”Toa Tahu asked how we would catch up without a Kakama. Toa Kopaka suggested we travel day and night, with the help of the Toa’s Ruru, until we were close to them. Toa Lewa nodded, noting that the Kal did not appear to be moving very fast. They just had a long head start after knocking the Toa out the previous day.So off we went again. We walked all afternoon and evening. After a quick supper break, we resumed the trail, with Jala and me riding on the Toa’s backs. I completely lost track of where we were walking in the dark, but we were definitely heading uphill. Just as the first rays of dawn were streaking across the western sky, we crested a ridge and saw the Bohrok-Kal, gathered around a big outcrop of volcanic rock. We ducked behind another boulder, and Kopaka shared his Akaku with us so we could see what the Kal were doing.The Nuhvok-Kal pulled something from a niche in the rock. “A krana,” muttered Toa Kopaka, his eyepiece whirring to zoom in on it. We all saw the small rubbery metallic object, which writhed slightly as the Kal of Gravity put it under the headplate of the Lehvak-Kal. Hasty plans were whispered. Toa Lewa gestured to Jala and me to stay behind the rock.Using their Huna, the Toa quietly crept out and surrounded the group of Kal. On Toa Tahu’s signal, they all reappeared at once, brandishing their weapons and yelling. The Kal seemed only mildly surprised. They slowly turned to face their attackers. Toa Lewa lunged for the Lehvak-Kal, but it blocked his katanas with its hand shields. Toa Tahu managed to pry open the headplate of the Kohrak-Kal with his weapon, exposing its krana. Toa Kopaka kicked the Nuhvok-Kal’s feet out from under it and stood with sword raised, ready to whack open its head.But at that moment the Gahlok-Kal raised its hand shields, saying calmly, “Allow me.” The three Toa were slammed together by a powerful magnetic force and fell over, unable to pull themselves apart.“Perhaps our foes will learn from this that even as a team, they are powerless to stop us,” remarked the Tahnok-Kal coolly as it snapped its companion’s head closed again. The Kal took one last look at the Toa, still tightly bound together and lying on the ground. Then they resumed their way.Once again, Jala and I sat around waiting for the Toa to return to normal. But this time they were awake. Except for the overwhelming worry I had felt last time, I almost preferred it when they couldn’t talk. Because all they did, as they rolled vainly on the ground, trying to wrench themselves free of each other, was argue about whose fault it was.While the Toa were still helpless, Jala climbed to the top of a crag and saw a guard unit in the distance. He made some sort of hand signals, and soon a scout appeared and spoke with him. The scout went away and returned with a package. Then he waved to me and ran off to rejoin his company. Jala came down the hill and opened the bundle. It was full of food, which was a very good thing, because we had just about run out of provisions. I stuffed it into my backpack. Jala told me that there was nothing new to report from Ta-Koro. But we expected that, since we had just tangled with the only bad news on Mata Nui.Finally, the magnetic effect began to wear off. The Toa were able to pull their arms and legs free first. They managed to sit up, their backs to each other. Jala took Toa Lewa’s hands while I pulled on Toa Tahu’s. Toa Kopaka clung to his swords, stuck in a crack in the rock, to anchor himself. After a lot of struggling, we managed to yank the three of them apart.Toa Lewa stood up, trying to brush off the chunks of rock that were still clinging magnetically to his chest. “No offense, true-friends, but that’s about as much brotherhood as I can stand for one day.”Toa Tahu and Toa Kopaka mumbled in agreement, for once. Jala suggested we take a breakfast break before we continued, since the Toa’s feet were still sticking to the rocky ground, which made walking difficult. I pulled some dried fish out of my pack. The Toa ate quietly, just looking off into the distance.By noon we were back on the trail, moving quickly so as not to let the Kal get too far ahead of us. No one seemed to have any desire to attack them again today. So we walked and walked, finally stopping for dinner on a slope of the Mangai. The lava flowing nearby kept us plenty warm without a fire. Even though Toa Tahu and Toa Kopaka wanted to keep going, Toa Lewa didn’t have much trouble convincing them to take a short rest. They all went to sleep as soon as the sun went down, since they had been hiking for almost two whole days and all night in between. Jala promised he would wake them up in a couple of hours so we could keep pace with our enemy.The first stars are just coming out as I write this. I wonder if Nixie is looking at the same ones through her telescope right now. She’s probably a bit more alert than I am, though. The stars are starting to look blurry. Since I’ve caught up on two days in my journal, I’m going to get some sleep.Summer 1 : 14I had a weird dream last night. I was alone on the cliff, looking through the telescope, and I saw six big stars against a dark sky scattered with small ones. As I watched, there was a seventh star that started glowing fiercely. Soon it was as brilliant as the first six. It kept increasing in intensity until my eyes hurt to look at it, but for some reason, I was unable to turn away. Then I realized I was staring at Jala’s lightstone, and he was shaking my arm. He was waking us all up in the middle of the night so we could get after the Kal again.I sat up. My stomach felt like it was in knots from the half-night of sleep and the dream. No one else really felt like eating breakfast either, so we started walking. I couldn’t feel too sorry for myself, because Jala didn’t get any rest at all. He fell asleep on Toa Kopaka’s back right away. I rode on Toa Tahu’s shoulders, trying not to think about all the creepy things that might be lurking out there in the darkness. I dozed off a few times, too, but Toa Tahu was kind enough to walk carefully so I didn’t fall off.As dawn broke, we stopped for breakfast. We must have been directly east of the Mangai, because the rays of the rising sun were streaming through the smoke rising off the volcano. My two favorite things together—light and heat—make such an incredible sight. Jala sat on the rock next to me and handed me some dried fruit he had pulled out of my pack. We ate quietly together as the burning sun ascended above the summit. It looked like it was rising out of the crater.Surprisingly, Toa Kopaka broke the silence. “We’ve almost caught up again,” he said quietly. “We need to think ahead this time.”Toa Lewa said, “We might have won last time, if we had stayed sight-hidden.”“Or if we had created a diversion to lure some of them away,” added Toa Kopaka. “Outnumbered, we were doomed to fail.”“Look, we didn’t have much time to prepare. We had a chance to do something, and that’s better than just sitting and griping. We’ve got to keep trying,” snapped Toa Tahu. I gathered that he had been the one that came up with the last plan.I leaned toward Jala and remarked that since the Toa were used to being elemental heroes, it must be really hard for them to get used to being oversized Matoran with mask powers.“That’s it!” cried Jala, standing up. The Toa turned to look at him, and I tried to make myself as small as possible. Jala seemed to regain his sense of propriety and asked, “May I make a respectful suggestion?”Toa Lewa nodded, and Jala said, “You Toa are used to being more powerful than your adversaries. We Matoran are used to being weaker. We have no inherent powers, only skills we have learned over time.” He produced and deployed his double-bladed dagger with one smooth, elegant motion. “Maybe I can help you learn to think like a Matoran.”Toa Tahu frowned. He didn’t look like he wanted to get lessons on being a Matoran. But then he asked Jala what he had in mind.“Since your tools no longer work to channel your powers, you should take a little time to master their use as weapons before you attack the Kal again.”Toa Lewa stood up and swung his blades through the air. “Good idea, guard-captain,” he smiled. “I got pretty quick-sharp with my axe. In fact, I almost felt like I was built knowing how to swift-wield it. Since I’ve had these katanas, though, I’ve really only used them to wind-soar.”Toa Kopaka leaped to his feet and laid his weapon across Toa Lewa’s. “Same here, with my skates,” he said. “But the double blade is definitely a different weapon than a single sword.”Toa Tahu brought his swords down onto the others’ crossed blades. “With no enemies to confront, I’ve mostly been surfing on mine. I say we do a little sparring.”Jala beamed. He was obviously pleased the Toa liked his idea. He offered to demonstrate a few of his Guard techniques.They gathered around him as he showed them various moves—thrusts, parries, feints, and so on. Then he asked me to come help him. I took my own knife out of my pack and awkwardly pulled it open. It was sticky with fruit juice. Jala used me as a stand-in for an enemy as he explained a few of the more complex maneuvers. I remembered all his terms from my guard training, even though I’m not any good at doing them. A couple of times I thought I was going to get jabbed, but Jala is really skilled with his blade, and he always stopped just short of contact.The Toa were barely patient enough to sit through the lesson. As soon as Jala paused, Toa Lewa spun his blades over his head. He brought them down and thrust them at an imaginary enemy the way Jala had demonstrated.The Toa of Fire and Ice began to try the moves, too. Each Toa ran through the Guard drills a few times and then began to add his own twist to them. After all, even though they had primarily used their new tools to travel or channel elemental powers, they were not exactly novices when it came to close combat.Then Toa Lewa danced in front of Toa Tahu, one blade in each hand, and eagerly asked if he was ready. Toa Tahu answered him by clanking his swords against Toa Lewa’s. They each stepped back a pace, and then the contest was on.I’m not going to describe every lunge and parry, but let me just say that it was breathtaking to watch. Toa Lewa’s agility and lightness on his feet contrasted sharply with Toa Tahu’s brute force approach. Toa Lewa would feint to one side, then flip over his own katanas and swing them toward Toa Tahu’s exposed other side. Toa Tahu would block the attack, then counter with a solid blow to Toa Lewa’s middle. Toa Lewa would nimbly dodge it somehow, and so on. Sometimes they used their swords separately, sometimes as one double blade. After a long session of intense sparring, both Toa were panting. Toa Lewa turned to Jala. “How are we doing, little fight-trainer?”“You’re asking me, mighty Toa?” laughed Jala. “I could only dream of fighting like that!”Toa Kopaka, who had been watching attentively, asked, “After you rest a moment, Tahu—”Toa Tahu took a deep breath. “I’m ready for you any time, Kopaka. Bring it on!”“As you wish,” shrugged Toa Kopaka. He walked toward Toa Tahu as Toa Lewa stepped back. They circled each other warily for a moment, and then Toa Tahu began the fight with a forceful blow to Toa Kopaka’s head. Toa Kopaka blocked it with his shield.“Get rid of that thing,” scoffed Toa Tahu. Toa Kopaka quickly folded his shield and stowed on his back. Then he spun his ice blades in the air and lunged at Toa Tahu, who jumped to the side. Toa Kopaka spun around, bringing his swords around behind him. Toa Tahu winced as they grazed his side. “You got me,” he groaned.Toa Tahu clenched his jaw and swung his weapon at Toa Kopaka’s legs. Toa Kopaka did a flip, but when he landed, he found himself staring at the tip of Toa Tahu’s fire sword. Toa Kopaka laughed. “Now you got me.”The Toa of Fire and Ice continued their skirmish until both were breathing hard. I suppose they remembered the incident when they lost their tempers just before the Kal’s arrival, so they were careful not to injure each other, but the fighting was still intense, and their faces were grim. Neither one seemed to want to be the first to quit. Finally Jala took advantage of a pause in the action and bravely jumped between them. “Toa, you might want to save some of that for the Kal,” he smiled brightly.“Right,” agreed Toa Tahu, lowering his swords. Toa Kopaka nodded.“Thanks for the fight-lesson, Jala,” grinned Toa Lewa. “Too bad the Kal don’t have katanas.”“Yes, hopefully you can get close enough to them to use some of this stuff,” Jala replied. “You can use those same moves to knock out a krana.”We decided to get going again. In spite of the physical exertion, the Toa seemed more energetic than before. I remembered what Jala had told me about troop morale, and I understood why he had been daring enough to teach the Toa to fight. I told him his idea was really smart.He said he never would have thought of it if I hadn’t had that insight about oversized Matoran. “You were the one with the idea. I just put it into practice,” he laughed. And it’s funny, but he’s right. That pretty much sums up why we work well together. I daydream, and he acts on it.The combat lesson set us back a little, so we didn’t catch up with the Kal by nightfall. They had led us back into Le-Wahi, and we decided to stop and get some rest, even though it meant another delay. I set off to gather firewood. Imagine my delight when I saw a Pakari Nuva lodged in a crack in a boulder! Once again, I happened to be in the right place at the right time. I ran back to camp, breathless, and told Toa Tahu. The Toa looked at one another.“Since your villager luck-found it, it should be yours, Tahu,” said Toa Lewa. Toa Kopaka nodded.Toa Tahu followed me to the mask. With considerable effort, he pried it out of the rock with his sword and put it on. He patted my back, saying, “Too bad it’s not a Kakama, but I guess it’s the next best thing.” Then he led me back to the others. As we ate dinner, the Toa discussed their plan for when we would catch up with the Kal. They agreed the invisibility trick would probably not work again, because the Kal might expect it. Instead, they’ve settled on another idea, which involves projecting illusions with their Mahiki to split up their enemies. Then they will use their newly sharpened combat skills to move in and capture the krana.I hope their confidence is well founded. I’m a little nervous about the whole thing. It’s my turn to do guard duty while the Toa sleep, so now I get to put my book away and stare out into the darkness for a couple of hours. Lucky me. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Amazing, but true! I got a phone call from Gali. And I thought she was mad at me for spreading rumors about her love life! But fortunately, in her wisdom Gali is slow to anger and quick to forgive.Gali Interviews GaliGeeGali: Hi GaliGee, mind if I interview you?GaliGee: Wow, what an honor! Sure!Gali: It’s not much of an honor. We’re bored out of our minds in here.GaliGee: Where are you?Gali: Trapped in the Bohrok nest. With a bunch of hot lava hanging over our heads.GaliGee: At the end of Comic #6!Gali: Yep. So, do you like cheese?GaliGee: Hey! Is this really TuragaVakama? How did you get your voice to sound like Gali’s?Gali [laughs]: No, it’s really Gali. We’ve been lurking on BZ for a couple of weeks now, and reading all your silly stuff.GaliGee: But, there’s molten lava over your heads! Aren’t you trying to do something about that?Gali: No, we’re just stuck here until LEGO gets Comic #7 out, anyway. At first we were on pins and needles, but then it became obvious we’ll just be waiting here for two months. So we’ve been reading BZ and moderator, hoping to find clues to the storyline. And talking with the Turaga. But mostly, we’re just killing time at this point. Your number was in my phone, in the Incoming Calls menu, so I just called you up.GaliGee: Wow! So Makuta was right! You’re in limbo!Gali: For once that [expletive deleted] wasn’t lying. We know what’s supposed to happen in Comic #8, thanks to D posting the script on BZ, but we don’t know what will happen between now and then.GaliGee: Incredible. So how are you getting onto the Internet?Gali: Kopaka’s PocketPC. It’s solar powered, and the glow from the lava is just enough to keep it running. If Tahu were in here, he could do it with his fire sword, but the poor guy is trapped in there with those Bohrok pods, so we just point the little solar cell at the lava.GaliGee: Aren’t you worried about Tahu?Gali: Definitely. But we know he’ll be OK, because he’s in Comic #8. I just hope he’s not suffering too much.GaliGee: What have you found out on the Internet?Gali: Well, LEGO finally put the Bahrag in the bios on bionicle.com, and now that Greg Farshtey has joined BZ, we learned some potentially useful stuff about the Va krana. Say, why don’t you guys put the pressure on him, maybe he’ll leak some secrets from the future storyline for us.GaliGee: That’s does sound useful. OK, we will.Gali: And we were really excited to hear that TheBlindMan2 is getting surgery for his eyes. We’re praying for him! Soon he’ll be able to see how beautiful I am.GaliGee: Um, well, yes, you are beautiful –Gali: I’m just kidding! We also got to see what we’ll look like when we go Nuva. I can’t wait! I just wish I knew whose evil butt I’m going to get to kick with those rock axes.GaliGee: They ARE impressive!Gali: And I read about how Makuta hacked into your phone line when you were trying to order a pizza, and that you and your friends have been minions of Makuta by spreading rumors about my love life.GaliGee [swallowing hard]: I’m really sorry about that. I hope you can forgive me.Gali: Of course. It happens to the best of us. Look at Lewa! Twice, already! But don’t let it happen again.GaliGee [breathing again]: I’ll do my best.Gali: I guess I shouldn’t have flooded your house. I just got sick of all the innuendo.GaliGee: It’s OK. It was insured. And now I don’t have six inches of clutter on my desk anymore.Gali: But what I want to know is, how did you and FallenTurtles know about the secret love affair between me and Kopaka?GaliGee: What? That was just a joke! I mean –Gali: Even LEGO didn’t know until you opened your big mouth! Did you run into our child on BZ?GaliGee [anxiously remembering flooded house]: But I – you mean “Kopaka and Gali’s Child”? But that’s just someone’s screen name! Isn’t it? How could LEGO not –Gali [laughing]: Tahu was right. You are SO gullible, GaliGee!GaliGee: Oh, man, that was cold.[The other Toa can be heard laughing in the distance.]Kopaka: OK, that’s enough. It wasn’t THAT funny.Onua: Gali, can I be your boyfriend in our next joke on GaliGee?Gali: Sure, honey.GaliGee: Pardon me?Gali: Oh, I was talking to Onua.GaliGee: So just how bored ARE you getting in there, Gali?Gali: Not bored enough to make out with Onua, if that’s what you’re wondering.GaliGee: Um, I wasn't, but...Onua: Oh, well. Hey, enough laughing, guys! It wasn’t THAT funny!Gali: We’ve been having a pretty good time, considering. Kopaka made us some blocks of ice to play with.GaliGee: How do you have a good time with blocks of ice?Gali: Well, first I took a flat one and scratched some lines in it with my hooks. Lewa chopped up another chunk into 24 pieces, and we played a checkers tournament.GaliGee: That’s pretty creative! Who won? Let me guess, Kopaka?Gali: You got it! He and I were in the finals. He beat me three times, and I beat him once. But I think he was just letting me win.Kopaka [with mock indignation]: I would NEVER do that!Gali: And then Pohatu chipped a Koli ball out of another ice block, and we had a Koli match.GaliGee: Pohatu won?Gali: Duh. So then we had an arm-wrestling contest.GaliGee: Onua?Gali: Yep. After that, we saw who could do the most back flips in a row.GaliGee: Lewa?Gali: Right. One hundred thirty-four. I did one hundred twelve.GaliGee: Wow! That’s a lot! Did YOU win anything?Gali: Swimming. I called some water out of the air and made a lap pool. But there’s one thing I don’t understand. For the size of this chamber we’re trapped in, there was way too much water. Something is strange here, but I don’t know what it is.GaliGee: Well, you’re the water expert. So, anything you want to say about Tahu since he’s not here?Gali: He’s going to read this someday, GaliGee! Besides, I don’t have anything catty to say about Tahu, anyway. Some people get the impression he’s stern and grumpy, but actually he’s a lot of fun to party with.GaliGee: Yeah, I got to see his humorous side when I interviewed him.Gali: Now wait a minute. I’m supposed to be interviewing you! And you have gotten me to talk the whole time!GaliGee: Sorry. It’s what I do best.Gali: I guess I just needed someone to talk to besides these guys. [yells] Hey, no more smart-aleck comments from the peanut gallery back there! [quieter] Sorry, GaliGee. We’re getting cabin fever something awful around here.GaliGee: Sorry about that. What can I do?Gali: Entertain me! I mean, Pohatu does a terrific Elvis impersonation, but I've already heard all his songs at least three times. Don’t you play the piano or something?GaliGee: Yes, but not very well. Do you want to hear me play anyway?Gali: Anything to keep me from going insane. Hey, wait! Something’s going on! I think the storyline is starting back up! [roaring noises]GaliGee: Really? What’s going on?Gali: The lava started to fall again! But Kopaka has frozen it in place, at least for a few minutes. And Pohatu and Onua are trying to bust this stone one more time. It’s still not giving way.GaliGee: Oh, this is awful!Gali: But wait – Lewa – how is that possible… ?! He’s gone through the wall! Wow, it wasn’t real! Lewa has gotten a lot wiser since he ripped off that krana.GaliGee: So are you getting out?Gali: Kopaka, if we can’t trust our senses here –GaliGee: What? [The Toa’s voices are drowned out by noise]Gali: I think we are already too late. Can you feel it? The ground is getting HOT!GaliGee: Um, if you can, tell me what’s happening.Gali: I think you’ll be reading about this soon, GaliGee. We were talking about Ta --[huge explosion]Gali: Tahu! He blasted himself out! Like a pressure cooker! Wow!GaliGee: Thank God.Gali: And the Great Beings. Do you ever get the feeling there’s a lot more to this island than we know about?GaliGee: Definitely.Gali: Tahu agrees with you, GaliGee.GaliGee: Now what is going on?Gali: Some kind of tunnel leading to – Oh! A big chamber. With six massive doors. It seems to have been prepared for us. But by whom? Allies? Enemies? The Great Beings themselves?GaliGee: What sort of doors?Gali: They have strange indentations. It looks like – this is where the krana fit! Lewa is having some kind of insight… talking about the end of the Bohrok…GaliGee: The end of the Bohrok? I know several Tohunga who will be glad to hear that. They always seem to use bad language when I ask about the Bohrok.Gali: And for good reason, GaliGee. OK, I think we are about to find the Exo-Toa armor. Pohatu? Did you have any last-minute questions for GaliGee? She could probably get Purple Dave’s instructions up for you if – oh, never mind, he has them memorized. Pohatu says to tell Purple Dave he’s very grateful for the instructions on how to modify the Exo so that he can fit in it.GaliGee: I’ll tell him. I’m sure Purple Dave will be glad they helped.Gali: Now each of us must go down a separate passageway. Here I go!GaliGee: Good luck, Gali.Gali: Thanks. [breathing hard] I’m going as fast as I can, but it’s a looooooong tunnel.GaliGee: Well, I won’t ask you any pesky questions while you’re running. I’m kind of surprised your battery has lasted this long.Gali: Me, too. It’s almost dead. OK, there’s a hatch opening ahead. Wow! This is awesome! I can’t wait to blast those vicious steroid-overdosed chickens with THIS! Ooooooh!GaliGee: Does it fit OK?Gali: Does it ever! Wow! OK, my feet are in right, I grab on here… Hmmm, how do I launch the rocket? [zzzzzap] Oh, that’s it! And this hammer claw thing? Yeah, baby!GaliGee: Sounds powerful!Gali: No kidding! All right, I’m all suited up. Let’s rock and roll!GaliGee: Sounds like you really like your job, Gali.Gali: Times like this, yes. I’ve been looking forward to killing off these monsters. Hey, this thing is helping me walk! It’s power-assisted! Fantastic!GaliGee: Great!Gali: Hey, guys! Now where are those Bahrag? Uh, GaliGee, we’re all back together, looking for – oh, there they are. [sounds of blasting and explosions]GaliGee: Are you OK, Gali?Gali: Never felt better! Take that, you [expletive deleted]! And that! Hey, this isn’t working! What’s going on here? Oh, man, the Bahrag have elemental powers, too, like the Bohrok. And it’s getting really hot in here.GaliGee: Keep fighting, Gali, Mata Nui needs you!Gali: I know. But times like this, I wish I had gotten a job with Mattel instead of LEGO. Those Barbies, they have it good. The Dream House, the pink Corvette…GaliGee: I can’t see you fitting in, though, in the Barbies’ world. You’d have to wear makeup and dresses.Gali: True. And Ken, what a wimp.GaliGee: Except for all the monstrous evil creatures, you have it pretty good. You get to work with five handsome heroes!Gali: Good point. And I love ‘em dearly, every one. Thanks for cheering me up. Well, I gotta go, it’s REALLY getting hot. I think I know what part is coming next, it’s… where I collapse… on the… floor…GaliGee: Uh, oh, hang in there, Gali! We’re rooting for you!Gali: OK… GaliGee… bye… now… [click]There you have it, BZ members, Gali and her noble friends in the thick of battle with the hideous Bahrag. Let’s encourage LEGO to get Comic #8 out, pronto! Thanks to TuragaVakama, FallenTurtles, TheBlindMan2, and Kopaka and Gali's Child for help on this one. This is GaliGee reporting. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.

Summer 2 : 7When I woke this morning, I felt really disoriented. I lay on my blanket and stretched out my arms. Unfortunately, I smacked Jala in the head, since I forgot how tall I am now. Usually he’s up before me, before it’s even light outside. Personally, I like to wait for the sun. But he was so tired from all the excitement yesterday that he was actually still asleep. Well, he was until I hit him in the head, anyway.Then, I remembered Turaga Vakama’s promise to have the Wall of History finished in two weeks. And I also realized that one of those precious days was going to be spent traveling back to Ta-Koro.Then I thought about how this was my last time to see Nixie for a while, so I jumped up, apologized to Jala, and headed, blinking, out of the tent into the sunshine.Some of the Ko-Koronans were already folding up their tents, but everyone else was just getting up. A few of the Ga-Koronans had set out a light breakfast of fish and meal cakes, and as we milled around, talking and dismantling the camp, we stopped by to snack on their food. Nixie was one of the last to wake up. She must have been up late looking through her portable telescope. She lugged it out of the tent just as Amaya pulled down the main pole, and I helped her carry it to Kai’s boat. Amaya, Kai, Nireta, and Kotu rolled up the tent and loaded it onto Puku’s back, and they followed us to the river.Well, Jala’s a lot smoother than I am about a lot of things. He helped Hahli load a bundle of blankets into the boats, and then I watched with envy as he smiled at her, patted her on the shoulder, and wished her a safe journey home. She laughed shyly, thanked him, and got into the skiff. As for me, while Turaga Nokama and the rest of the Ga-Koronans finished loading their watercraft, I stood across from Nixie for an awkwardly long time, feeling like my mouth was stuck shut with Bula berry paste. She flashed me her inimitable smile and thanked me for all I had done for our people. I stammered a few undoubtedly embarrassing words which, mercifully, I can’t even remember. Then she stepped into the boat, and Kai pushed off. “Later, guys!” she called. She flipped some water at Lito with her paddle as she steered out into the open water.“Lito, I think Kai likes you,” said Raku.“Why do you say that?” asked Lito, wiping off his wet mask. “She’s always picking on me!”“Trust me,” Raku grinned.The trip home was pretty uneventful, and I don’t really feel like writing about it. Our longer legs really do make a difference. But all I could think of the whole time was how dreary the next two weeks are going to be. Carving is fun once in a while, but for twelve—no, eleven—days straight? I was really hoping to get some surfing in. With these rebuilt bodies, it’s going to be awesome! But not for me... at least, not yet.Raku and Lito chatted the whole way home about everything that had happened at the party and made big plans to ride the lava waves. They want to lengthen their boards, now that we’re strong enough to control something bigger. They’re really eager to go up to the Kalala Lava Cave and surf deeper inside it. I made a few remarks to them, but mostly I just kept quiet.Jala, on the other hand, talked about nothing but work. Turaga Vakama told him he would have to reduce the active Guard roster by about half and reassign Matoran to civilian duties, now that we had peace. But just to be safe, they would still undergo periodic training as reserves. By the time we got home, he had planned out the reorganization of the entire Guard in his head.Tupako pretty much avoided me, which was easy to do in such a big crowd. But every now and then I caught him glancing over at me resentfully. I just don’t understand that guy. Why can’t he just live and let live? I guess he’s jealous that I’ve gotten to travel. But now that the danger is past, he’ll have a chance to do it, too, if he wants to.My mind kept wandering back to Nixie. She was so nice to me! Maybe she really does like me after all, even though I keep making a fool of myself. I tried to come up with some sort of excuse to visit her before the two weeks are up, but then I decided I’d better just wait.And I thought about what I had learned about the Turaga and Makuta. I’ve got a thousand questions for Turaga Vakama. What was this business about ‘industrial accidents’? I’ve often wondered who invented all the amazingly complex machines we use in our day-to-day lives. Who built all that stuff? Nuparu is a really brilliant inventor, but even he is usually at a loss to explain how those devices really work. There must have been a time in history during which someone was making machines like that on a regular basis. Was that during the days before Makuta scrubbed our memories? More mysteriously, why haven’t the Turaga, who so delight in telling stories, ever talked about any of this before? My mind was reeling with unanswered questions. I resolved to sit down with Turaga Vakama and get some straight answers... just as soon as I finish carving a month of really intense adventures into a stone wall in less than two weeks. Sigh.Now I’m back in my hut, with Puku safely sleeping in her niche next door. I just flipped back through my journal, and it’s obvious I’ll need to spend my first day going through this long-winded thing and marking which passages to put on the Wall. Well, I guess I’d better get some sleep. Strong new legs notwithstanding, my whole body is really tired, and my brain even more so.Summer 2 : 8This morning I had little desire to get out of bed, but eventually I did. I hauled my hammer and chisel, my journal, and my weary self down to the Wall of History, and here I sit. I guess I’d better figure out how much I’ll need to carve every day to make the deadline Turaga Vakama has so generously set for me.Date of first Bohrok-Kal attack: Summer 1:1Date of defeat of Bohrok-Kal: 2:320 (entries in month 1) + 3 (entries in month 2) = 23 entries(I think I missed a day or two, but the subsequent entries are twice as long, so I’ll just do it this way to keep it simple.)Today: 2:8Deadline: 2:1818 – 8 = 10 days23 / 10 = 2 remainder 3So I must carve 2 entries per day for 7 days, and 3 entries per day for 3 days.Check: 2 * 7 + 3 * 3 = 23 OK.Today is halfway over, so it’ll be a two-entry day. I guess I’d better stop stalling and get to work.Whew, what a rotten day. I’m writing this in the evening. As soon as I flipped my journal open to the first entry and set my chisel against the wall, Turaga Vakama walked in. He greeted me warmly and handed me a special new tool he called a “Chronicler’s staff.” It’s a strangely shaped instrument, with one sharp edge, a pointed tip, and a flat spot where I can pound on it with my hammer. The cutting edge is a lot narrower than that of my chisel, so it will make nice clean letters. “This should make your job much easier, Takua,” he assured me. Then he looked at the wall. “What? You haven’t even made a mark yet!”I explained that I had just figured out how many entries I needed to carve per day. He walked over to my journal. “How many pages have you written in this book, anyway?” he asked.I suddenly realized that it was open to the page where I had written about not telling him everything. I quickly grabbed the book and flipped to the page where the Toa defeated the Kal. “Oh, quite a few.”“Goodness, that’s a lot of writing! I’d be happy to assign you an assistant,” he suggested.“Oh, no, that’s quite all right,” I stammered, mortified at the thought of someone else reading my babblings about Nixie. “I have to edit it as I go, because there’s a lot of unnecessary description and so on.”He smiled at me. “Well, suit yourself, then, Takua. But see that you get it done. The entire population of Mata Nui will be here in two weeks, expecting to hear it read aloud for the first time.”“Yes, sir,” I replied.I had forgotten what hard work carving is. Even with the new staff, it’s proceeding very slowly. After chipping on that blasted wall all afternoon, my hands feel weak and shaky. I made it through the first entry and half the next by dinner time. It’s obvious I’m going to have to cut out all of the dialogue except for a few of the Toa’s more memorable statements. Toa Pohatu is certainly not going to have to worry about me putting the goats on there. I’m not going to carve a single letter more than I have to.And I’m wondering who the genius was who designed our alphabet with a circle around each letter. It would be so much easier to carve if I just put the middle parts in! But it’s got to be done right.Now I’ve got to get some rest, because tomorrow I have to catch up on that last half-entry from today. No more sleeping late!Summer 2 : 9 Today would have been complete misery except for Jala. That guy is the best friend a Matoran could ever want.Well, I woke up really early this morning, ate a quick breakfast, and started carving on the Wall. Just as I was really getting into it, who should wander down there but Tupako. He was casually swinging his koli stick as if he were toying with the idea of using it on me. “How are you doing, Chronicler?” he sneered.“Uh, fine, Tupako,” I replied, being careful to get his name right this time. I turned back to my work.He sat on a rock and watched me chisel for a while, which really unnerved me. Finally, I turned around and asked him what he wanted. He said, “Oh, I was just wondering if you were up for a koli game. But it looks like you’ll be busy with this for quite a while! No more carefree sightseeing for you, eh?” Then, to my immense relief, he ambled out of the room.After he left, I struggled with my angry thoughts for a little while. “Carefree sightseeing,” indeed! Now, I have no delusions that I’m some kind of hero. Still, it should be obvious to everyone that my travels have been anything but carefree. I finally decided that I was just getting worked up over nothing, though. It was best to simply put the thought of him out of my mind altogether.Then, a few hours later, Raku and Lito showed up, carrying their lava boards. Raku had welded on an extra piece to make his longer. They were planning to go test out the new design in the Kalala lava cave, and they invited me to go along. “Come on, Takua. You need a break! You’re going to go crazy down here if you don’t get some recreation once in a while.”I was really tempted to go. But after falling behind on the very first day, I felt like it wouldn’t be a good idea. “Guys, I’d really love to, but I’ve got to finish this or Turaga Vakama will kill me. Let me know how the new board works!”They nodded and turned to go. I watched them dash eagerly up the stairs, my heart wistful and heavy. I went back to my carving.Finally, in the late afternoon, when I was starting to feel really sorry for myself, Jala came down. He brought some roasted nuts, and we sat down to eat. “Takua, you’ve been working really hard,” he remarked, scanning the wall. “I know you’re tired. But don’t get discouraged! You’ll have it done soon.”I smiled weakly and reached for more nuts with my aching hand. “Yeah, it’s hard to keep my spirits up. This is pure drudgery.”“Really? I thought you liked to write,” he said.“I do. But this isn’t writing. It’s transcribing. The exciting part is already over.”“Oh, I see,” he nodded. “But if you think about it, this is just as important as writing in your journal. If no one sees what you write, what good does it do? You keep talking about how journalism is spreading truth and light. That only works when others have access to your stories.”As usual, Jala made perfect sense. And it was exactly what I needed to hear at that moment. I patted him on the back. “Thanks, Jala,” I smiled. “You’ve just given me a huge morale boost.”“What are friends for?” he grinned back.After he left, I had new energy. I carved two and a half days’ worth of writing onto the wall today. So I’ve caught up with my schedule. And my hands are still sore, but they’re starting to get used to the peculiar combination of movements, so I think by tomorrow, I’ll be all right.Yeah, Jala. Where would I be without him?Summer 2 : 10This morning I carved for a couple of hours straight. When my hands got tired and my stomach rumbly, I sat down with some dried meat for a snack. But then I started wondering about what had been written on the wall before the section I was working on. I took my food and walked all the way down the wall to the very end.Here were carved the very first recorded events in Mata Nui history. I held up my lightstone and began to read. The date on the first entry indicated it was over a thousand years old! The Turaga have never told us of anything that happened that long ago, except in summary form. It’s hard to believe I’d never gotten curious enough to read this old stuff before. But there was always a journey to make, or a wave to surf.“Arrival on Mata Nui. Exploration of the island revealed suitable locations for six new villages.” The text went on to describe in detail the construction of each Koro under the guidance of the Turaga. Apparently the villages were thriving for quite a while. There was a long section on the invention of koli, and extensive lists of champions of yearly sports tournaments. I recognized many of my friends, including Huki, Maku, and Jala. To my surprise, my own name was listed as winner of the Ignalu one year.Then there was a really long gap in the dates. The next entry revealed the reason. “A time of great hardship has come upon us. It appears the evil Makuta, brother of the Great Spirit who sustains us with his providence and his guidance, has followed us here. He has placed infected masks on the wild creatures of the island, turning them from their natural ways toward savagery and viciousness. Let us pray that before he was treacherously cast into slumber, Mata Nui, in his infinite wisdom, made arrangements to bestow new Toa on us soon. We await a sign.”There was some discussion of the tactics developed by the Matoran in the early days to defend the villages. Then there was another long gap in the record, followed by a slight change in the style of the letters. As I scanned the next section of the wall, I saw my name again. “The Turaga have been carried off by infected Rahi and are presumably prisoners of the Makuta. Takua the Ta-Koronan has defied orders to stay in the village and set out to do an errand requested by Turaga Whenua before his disappearance.”I scratched my head, wondering what had possessed me to do such a thing. I had been hoping, since I couldn’t remember any of this, that the wall would supply some answers. But I shrugged off my disappointment and kept reading.The chronicle related how I had gone to Onu-Koro, finding Turaga Vakama’s firestaff in the center of the village. Seeing the words on the wall triggered a flood of memories. As clear as day, I saw myself bending over to pick up the firestaff. I remember turning it over in my hands, admiring the intricate engravings worn by years of use until they were almost invisible. Then sudden fear gripped me. Why had the Turaga’s tool been so easy to find? And why hadn’t the Onu-Koronans seen it? It must have been placed there a moment before I arrived. Was this a trap?I quickly backed into the gloom of a nearby tunnel. But this offered no protection against a spirit of darkness and his shadowy minions. Panicked, I ran down the tunnel.Naturally, this led me right into the trap I had suspected. Surrounded by hissing, snarling Rahi, I desperately swung the staff at them. Then I remembered the Madu fruit in my pack. I hurled them in all directions. Meanwhile, rocks were rolling down one of the walls, forcing me to dance out of the way.To make matters worse, some of the “rocks” turned out to be alive! When I realized they were actually coming after me, I started spinning in a circle with the staff in my outstretched hand. They staggered away, dazed, but more kept coming. Then I saw the big one, the Vatuka. I had heard about these strange beasts around a campfire at the island-wide games, I think, but I had never seen one. It was huge and menacing, but I finally subdued it with my last Madu fruit.In the silence that followed this din, I heard a muffled cry. I looked around and saw a huge lever. Could this be a door mechanism? I rolled a boulder onto it, and luckily, my hunch was correct. The door latch released, and a grateful Turaga Whenua crawled out to greet me.As I was reading, a voice behind me startled me. I spun around to see Turaga Vakama. “Hello, Takua,” he smiled. “I see you are studying your ancient history.”“Uh, yes, I was hoping to remember some of it,” I admitted. “Why did I go to Onu-Koro to help Turaga Whenua in the middle of the infected Rahi invasion?”“I don’t know,” replied Turaga Vakama. “I wasn’t there, as you may recall. You saved me later on.”“Oh, right. Who wrote all this?”“I did, at first. When I was kidnapped, Jala took over for a while. He may be able to fill you in. In fact, I believe he was quite opposed to your leaving. He was often irritated with you back then for constantly wandering away from the village.”“Really?” I asked sheepishly, wondering what other trouble I had caused the Matoran who would later become my best friend.Turaga Vakama nodded. “Well, I’ll let you get back to work. Is everything going according to schedule?”“Yes, I’m keeping up,” I nodded. I wasn’t actually sure if that was true, but I figured I would do a little extra carving tonight if necessary.As soon as the slow tapping of his staff on the stairs faded away, I ran back to the place I had been carving and checked my notes. In the previous two days I’ve carved four entries, so I knew I had to get at least two more done today. I had already carved almost one day before I started getting distracted.So I went back to work. There was only one other interruption today. Raku and Lito came running in, all breathless. “Takua!” exclaimed Raku loudly, even though I was standing only a bio away. “My new long board is awesome! You have got to try it!”“Yeah,” Lito agreed. “You should have seen Raku catching those big surges only Toa Tahu could do before! I tried it, too, and it’s so much fun!”“That’s great, guys. As soon as I’m done with this blasted wall, I’ll be looking forward to that.”“Why wait, Takua? You’re going to turn into a Kofo-Jaga, all creepy and half-blind, living down here in the dark. Take an afternoon off.”“Raku, I’ll get really behind if I do that,” I protested. “And Turaga Vakama will kill me if I don’t get this finished in time.”“Well… at least let us take your board and lengthen it,” suggested Lito.“All right, that would be great. Thanks.”“We’ll see you later, then, Takua,” said Raku. They bounded up the stairs.With a heavy heart, I started chiseling again. But then I reminded myself of Jala’s encouraging words from yesterday, and by nightfall, I finished two whole entries of my journal.Now, as I sit on my bed and stare at the stuff I just wrote in here, I’m struck by two things. One, I’m really glad I won’t have to transcribe all THIS random nonsense into stone. And two, what kind of lunatic would carve words all day for his job and then write more at night solely for his own pleasure? I just rewrote a big section of the wall into my journal, too, the part about rescuing Turaga Whenua. I must be crazy!But somehow it’s really satisfying to write down my thoughts. It’s like talking to a trusted friend. And speaking of trusted friends, I’ve got to ask Jala why I went to Onu-Koro way back then. There’s bound to be a story-tale there, as Toa Lewa would say!Enough is enough. Good night.Summer 2 : 11Today was just work, work, work until Jala came down to see me. First, he apologized for not stopping by yesterday. “Things were totally frantic with the Guard,” he explained. I shrugged and told him I understood. It’s really nice of him to visit me, whenever he can show up.Then I asked him why I had gone to Onu-Koro to run this errand for Turaga Whenua. “That’s just it,” he laughed. “You wouldn’t tell us what you were doing for him. I figured it was an excuse to get out of the village and go sightseeing, instead of your real job.”“What was my real job?” I asked.“You were a lava farmer. I suppose Turaga Vakama will assign you to the fields again after you’re done with the wall.”I groaned, imagining how bored I would be doing that. “So, you carved some of this wall, too?”Jala nodded. “A little. After Turaga Vakama vanished, I wrote down a few things. And when he got back, he asked me to go ahead and record your adventures while saving him and the other Turaga.”“I like your style,” I smiled. “Very concise.”He laughed. “I’m not much of a storyteller. I like to get to the point.”At the end of the day, I stood in front of the Wall, covered with rock dust, admiring my freshly carved two and a half entries. Nixie was on my mind, because as I had read through my journal to know what to write, I had come across a mention of her. It occurred to me that maybe I should take her up on her offer to show me the stars.So after night fell, right before the guards lowered the bridge, I sneaked across with a lava board under my arm. Raku and Lito had taken mine to lengthen it, but I found an extra one lying in the armory. I walked the long, rocky path to the beach and approached the telescope. Imagine my delight when I saw a boat tied to the mooring at the base of the telescope cliff!I climbed the winding staircase cut into the stone and approached the telescope. I made some noise by dragging my board on the rocks so I wouldn’t startle her, and then I called out, “Nixie? Are you up here?”The door of the pedestal opened, and a slightly anxious Nixie peered out. “What are you doing up here, Takua?” she asked in surprise.I reminded her of her invitation, hoping she had really meant it. Fortunately, she smiled and asked me to come inside. She had a small lightstone to illuminate her desk, which was under piles of papers covered with numbers, an abacus, and a pen. The telescope, with its cryptic readouts of coordinates, was aimed at a big red star. She explained that this red star was like a time marker, moving through the constellations as the prophecies unfolded. Then she pointed out various stars that represented particular beings. There were six representing the Toa, and one bright galaxy that was Mata Nui, isolated from the others, as he was in his sleep.I asked if there was one for Makuta. Nixie swiveled the telescope across the sky. I looked into the crystal and saw a cloud of colorful gases with a dark spot in the center. “That thing represents Makuta,” she whispered. “It’s not really a star, but a dark mass that draws power from the matter around it.”I felt a cold shiver run up my spine. Even Makuta’s astral object seemed to radiate darkness and fear. “You know, Nixie,” I said slowly, “he’s still out there somewhere.” I immediately realized I shouldn’t have told her, because Turaga Vakama seemed to want to keep that a secret.But Nixie didn’t look surprised at all. “I know,” she said quietly. “I watched that thing explode when he was defeated, but then it began to coalesce again.”I was relieved that she already knew, and that my indiscretion really didn’t matter. But the thought of Makuta gaining strength gave me the creeps. I quickly turned the telescope away and changed the subject. “Is there a star for me?”“Of course. Turaga Nokama just asked me to locate it, actually. I think it’s that yellowish one, over there, not far from the Toa’s stars. But I still have some calculations to finish.” She gestured toward the desk.I was kind of surprised to hear that Turaga Nokama was interested in my star, but then again, she had been the one to name me the Chronicler and talk about my destiny. “How about your star, Nixie?”“I don’t know which one it is. I haven’t had time to locate something as trivial as my star yet!” she laughed.I told her that it wasn’t trivial to me, and she blushed. She said something about being really behind in her work, so I took the hint and excused myself. But before I left, she thanked me for coming by and flashed me that incredible smile of hers. She promised that next time we met, she would know more about my destiny. I didn’t really want to know that badly. I had just been trying to make conversation. But maybe she would find out something interesting, and it was flattering that she was working on my star. Even if Turaga Nokama had told her to do it.I reached the village by surfing across the lake and climbing the cliff, since the bridge was down for the night. Lito was on guard duty, and he waved me through his station. I wonder if he noticed that I skipped all the way to my hut. If you would like to post comments, please do so in my GaliGee's Stories topic.